Home

FRENIC-VG IM INR-SI47_1580b-E

1. a Main Nameplate Figure 1 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter Code Series name E EE FRN FRENIC series Code Code Nominal applied motor J 0 75 0 75 kW E 1 5 1 5 kW C 2 2 2 2 kW Z 800 800kW nF 4 Code Structure None Unit type Code S Standard stack type S B Phase specific stack type Code 1 Code VG Note In this manual inverter types are denoted as FRN_ _ _VG10 20 40 TYPE FRNSOVG1S 4J SER No 68A123A0579E b Sub Nameplate Special type Shipping destination Instruction manual language Japan Japanese EU English China Chinese Special type Power supply voltage Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V Enclosure Basic type Development code 1 series Applicable area High performance vector control The FRENIC VG is available in two or three drive modes depending upon the inverter capacity High Duty HD and Low Duty LD modes or High Duty HD Medium Duty MD and Low Duty LD modes One of these modes should be selected to match the load property of your system Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate High Duty HD mode designed for heavy duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min 200 for 3 s Continuous ratings Inverter ratings Medium Duty MD mode designed for medium duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank higher capacity of inverters Low Duty LD mode designed for light duty load app
2. v lt 2 f w Data setting range N amp E Format type D lt E YN gt u Q D gt 2 Q 8 s Q Z Change when running N O afe vows ATI WC for PSH SEs mil See Terminal Y1 Function a S we Jee yee fe yO E ee TEE ee o ME uN Y Y dE rv See Terminal Y1 Function mil we r See Terminal Y1 Function 000 to 111 Detection mode of 0xE39 E40 E41 o Yiyi o v vin y Y Y Y Y N Y 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed Under V f control only the specified reference speed is valid 0 to 30000 r min Y 1500 Y Y Y Y Y Y If N FB1 Detected speed 1 or N REF4 Reference speed 4 exceeds this speed detection level 1 the inverter issues the detection signal 300001030000 mio a ri Py reco ves vv lv hy 1 0 to 20 0 3 0 YIY 2 ae If the detected speed comes within the range of N REF2 Reference speed 2 this detection width the inverter issues the detection signal 1 0 to 20 0 Y Y 2 YIYINIY If N FB2 Detected speed 2 is within the range of N REF4 Reference speed 4 this detection width the inverter issues the detection signal 0 000 to 5 000s Nana an Y a Y Y x Y El M 9 Disable Tenths place Power supply phase loss detection 7 0 Standard level T For particular manufacturers 0 to 300 YIY 16 Y YI YIY Calculated value under V f control If the torque command exceeds this s
3. N amp i Vit Change when running 4 0to5 O Internal ASR output 1 Ai terminal input T REF 2 DIA card 3 DIB card 4 Communications link 429h D1h Torque Command Source 42Ah D2h Torque Current Command Source O Internal ASR output 1 Ai terminal input 7 REF 2 DIA card 3 DIB card 4 Communications link 0to3 0 Internal calculation 1 Ai terminal input MF REF 2 Function code H44 3 Communications link eo ely vs 0 to 2 Y Y 79 Y 0 Disable 1 Enable Load disturbance observer 2 Enable Oscillation suppressing observer y oo vlyv 3 vvnjy A A ZE 0 001 to 50 000 kgem Y k YIN 4 Y Y N Y The magnification is switchable by H228 1 0 001 to 50 000 kgem Y 0 001 IYIN 4 YIYIN Y The magnification is switchable by H228 0 to 3 Y Y 67 Y Y Disable line speed Integrated PG enabled Note that Ai input or PG LD should be high level select in UPAC Detect analog line speed Al LINE Detect digital line speed PG LD High level selected signal Select high level of motor speed and line speed IN 0 to 100 times Y Gal 4o o e k 42Bh D3h Magnetic Flux Command Source o D D amp Z E OIS Q a p ro O D oO O Q oo Ml lt p Xf XP Vw PG lt z zp VC wl PG z z Zt E Vor PI EE 42Ch D4h Magnetic Flux Command Value 42Eh D7h Observer Mode selection M1 compensation gain M2 compensation ga
4. m CN Rand reer BE gt L CNW E ik di C AER a power input ERE terminals i Bia Power PCB i Auxiliary D i _ Auxiliary power input power input JL terminals terminals AE a gt _ gt Fan power Auxiliary fan power input E Y supply terminals EJES bess switching OE Fa TITT y connectors CN R and Power switching CN W connectors CN UX a FRN37VG10 20 to FRN75VG10 20 b FRN9OVG10 20 FRN75VG 10 40 to FRN110VG1 0 40 FRN132VG 10 40 to FRN630VG1 0 40 Figure 2 2 14 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals Note To remove each of the jumpers pinch its upper side between CN UX your fingers unlock its fastener and pull it up When mounting it fit the jumper over the connector until it snaps into place Ny CN R CN W Figure 2 2 15 Inserting Removing the Jumpers NH Power switching connectors CN UX for inverters of 75 kW or above 400 V class series Inverters of 75 kW or above 400 V class series are equipped with a set of switching connectors male which should be configured according to the power source voltage and frequency By factory default a jumper female connector is set to U1 If the power supply to the main power inputs L1 R L2 S L3 T or the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 matches the conditions listed below change the jumper to U2 For the switching instructions see Figure 2 2 14 and Figure 2 2 15 a FRN75VG10 40 to FRN110VG10 40
5. o 0042004 _ vMA O Mey PROTECT 0 CHG OK O 1 STOP AV3DATA Function code data modification screens Figure 3 2 1 Configuration of Screens for DATA SET 48 The screen transition and hierarchy structure in Running and Programming modes are shown below Programming mode a Digital speed setting Ay ww mm or om O LANGUAGE Running mode Initial screen at startup W hen F57 0 Select menu gt 2 DATA CHECK O LANGUAGE 1 DATA SET 2 DATA CHECK e 3 OPR MNTR When F57 1 AV gt MENU SHIFT 3 OPR MNTR I g nto selecta menu A s l 4 I O CHECK SPD bout TR Leave for 5 sec or sa TENANC Select LED monitor EYTIME 6 LOAD 7 ALM 8 ALM 10 DAT IMAR Y Hz RRENT Ay E o MOTOR SPEED to switch 1 REFERENCE SPEED screens 2 OUTPUT FR Q PR 3 MOTOR TORQUE cu 4 REFERENCE MO OR TORQUE 11 CHA 5 CAL MOTOR TORQUE 6 MOTOR OUTPUT POWER kW 7 OUTPUT CURRENT I 12 DAT 8 OUTPUT VOLTAGE Vv 9 DC LIN VOLTAGE Vv 10 REFER NCE MAGNETIC FLUX 14 LIM 3 CAL MAGNETIC FLUX J MOTOR TEMPERATUR 13 LOAD HAFT SPEED 14 LINE PEED 15 Ai 12 ADJUSTMENT 16 Ai Ai1 ADJUSTMENT 17 Ai Ai2 ADJUSTMENT 18 Ai Ai3 ADJUSTMENT 19 Ai Ai4 ADJUSTMENT 20 PID RE ERENCE 2 1 PID FE DBACK 22 PID OUTPUT 23 OPTION MONITOR 1 24 OPTION MONITOR 2 25 OP
6. 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C 10 The inverter has been tested with IEC EN61800 5 1 2007 5 2 3 6 3 Short circuit Current Test under the following conditions Short circuit current in the supply 10 000 Af Maximum 240 V for 200 V class series with 22 kW or below Maximum 230 V for 200 V class series with 30 kW or above Maximum 480 V for 400 V class series 146 8 2 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification us www Originally the UL standards were established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc as private criteria for inspections investigations pertaining to fire accident insurance in the USA Later these standards were authorized as the official standards to protect operators service personnel and the general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards cUL certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards E Notes UL cUL listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada by installation within precautions listed below AXCAUTI
7. 2 o H17 il o gt y Y Y ii TL 0 Keypad or input to terminal 12 Y Y 70 Y Y Y Y 1 Analog input PID REF Run command self hold time 0 0 to 30 0 s N EA Active Drive Oor1 N 0 Disable 1 Enable Under vector control this function automatically limits the output torque to avoid an overload trip etc EEE C6h PID Control Mode selection O to 3 0 Inactive 1 Active 2 Inverse action 1 3 Inverse action 2 Y 1 lt po lt ix vCwPG z lt vcwoPG 89 33 VO for ems H20 414h D Cc gt o o oO S q a viy H21 415h C7 gt Oor 1 Command selection H22 P action O 88 S gt 3 H23 00001 aaa noche 3 H24 2189 can D action 1 0 000 10 10 008 Y 0 000 VV a vivo H25 aon cen Upper limi 1 300 0300 Tn o s LVI H26 Lower limit H27 41Bh Speed command selection E 0 Disable 1 Select PID 2 Select auxiliary speed H28 acn GFh Droop Control O foot H29 h getting changed mistakenly via the link T Link RS 485 etc Via the link data can be written to the function code fields given above or command data fields S fields The S fields are defined by H30 Link operation O to 3 Monitor Command Run command data FWD REV RS 485 Communication 10 0 to 255 Broadcast 0 RTU 99 Fuji Address 1 to 255 Specify the station address of RS 485 hal Error processing O to 3 Immediately trip
8. FRN75VG1 0 20 15 Ed maes 300x2 152x2 g Q a Q am MS an DD A J No Po P x wa N KN FRN90VG1 0 20 Note 1 Control circuit terminals Note 2 A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the shipping destination No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 148 ems AS 2 rl is lio Ly N N wa G DO Uy Pm AW Eg 60 C Cu wire i EH Bx a Sr N 6 E i 2 N N wa 3 26 7 42 4 1 0 53 5 4 0 107 2 3 0x2 85x2 4 0x2 107 2x2 300x2 152x2 A Tightening torque 6 1 lb in 0 7 N m Recommended wire size AWG16 1 25 mm Aux control power supply Aux fan power supply Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION Required torque NE Ib in N m Wire size AWG mm E L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter type Power supply voltage Class J fuse size Circuit breaker trip size O Main terminal S Oo Nominal applied motor Aux Fan power supply taa KE ND louolielra 60 Cu wire A gt gt OREN a S E DS 1 p 75 C Cu wire N N ha R N W pg BD Q Ww W 4 3 N a DN P 60 C Cu wire Aux control power suppl Aux control power supply Aux fan power supply RN3 7V G10 40 EJ 12 17 5 119 4 200 150 13 5 75 ene ls 0S RN5 5VG10 40 EN 75 C Cu wir
9. For details refer to the Functional Safety Card instruction manual 108 Related ae Alarm sub Num monitor Description aak Detailed error cause function code This function displays 4 on the LED monitor if a failure or warning registered as a light alarm occurs It outputs the L ALM signal on the Y terminal but it does not issue an alarm relay output 30A 30B 30C so the inverter continues to run Light alarm objects selectable Motor overheat 77 Motor overload Li ito LLJ NTC wire break error 11175 External failure 417 NS RS 485 communications error 75 Network error EG Toggle data error 5 Mock alarm nr Light alarm DC fan locked 44 Speed mismatch warning e E H106 to H108 H110 H111 E SX bus tact synchronization error 47 SF25 to Motor overheat early warning MOH SF27 Motor overload early warning MOL Lifetime alarm LiF Only Heat sink overheat early warning OH SnF Inverter overload early warning OL Battery life expired BAT Start delay LiL Functional safety card light alarms Sr Alarms that could occur in the functional safety card An individual alarm is not selectable as a light alarm object Light alarm objects can be checked on the keypad This function protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear between Surge one of the power lines using surge absorbers protection connected to th
10. lo 0 to 79 See Terminal X1 Function c 2 N amp D S Z Z 5 c 0 lt 0 D Z q lt O D D amp c gt p eN o oO 5 o S D oO O QOQ Cw fs ier Drive control lt _ lt lt lt _ lt lt lt vewPe lt lt lt 2 lt veworo _ lt lt k 2 lt z x lt J lt f lt lt lt 2 vc for PMsm 7 yf nol TemnalPG Fuscion 11079 Seo Terminal K Funcion n e feer vv yy Bh Terminal X4 Function 1 0to79 See Terminal Xt Function N a vrs y Ch Terminal X5 Function 1 01079 See Terminal X1 Function n 4 vils Yi Dh Terminal X6 Function 1 O to 79 See Terminal X1 Function 7Eh Terminal X7 Function xii xii 1 vto 79See Temna Funcion fn e itri 0 to 79 See Terminal X1 Function 0 to 79 rms See Terminal X1 Function i TESE xii xii 17 Jo19 78 See Terminal et Function K 2 yy sr vi 1 0 to 79 See Terminal Xt Funcion n v sr 1 0 to 79 See Terminal Funston N vi e mil 0000 to 01FF 0 Normal open 1 Normal close E14 specifies whether to open or close the contact for terminals X1 to X9 0 to 84 0 Inverter running RUN 1 Speed valid N EX 2 Speed agreement 1 N AG1 3 Speed arrival signal N AR 4 Speed detected 1 N DT1 5 Speed detected 2 N DT2 6 Speed detected 3 N DT3 7 Undervoltage detect
11. 100 00 to 100 00 Ea Ea Y Y Y Y KAKANJ y Y inv y Y y y y Y y y y Y viv Nararara asad alae Kd Raabe Ka alae Rana kata xiin MIA Initialization Format type E 51 lt vewe re E lt Change when running Default setting Data copying mef o rheme H pee A elre 1E04h ia m Oo SL h Ai3 Dead Zone m O h ova Ratio for FA FB Pulse Numerator 1E0Ah Denominator 1E0Eh h Speed Agreement 2 Detection width 1E0Fh Off delay timer 1E10h h Speed Agreement 3 1E11h Off delay timer 1E12h h Electric Motor Fan Stop Signal Preset Temperature o 1 0 to 20 0 Detection width If N FB2 Detected speed 2 is within the range of Ea Offset cae 100 00 to 100 00 h Ai1 Dead Zone 0 00 to 10 00 Limits all command values except input values to 0 V hlAi2DeadZone 1 0 00t0 10 00 C C 0 00 VV s jfr EE EA EE Y E EEES A E 2 1 to 65535 Specifies the numerator of the dividing ratio for FA and FB pulse output 1 to 65535 Specifies the denominator of the dividing ratio for FA and FB pulse output 1 0 to 20 0 If N FB2 Detected speed 2 is within the range of N REF4 Reference speed 4 this detection width the inverter issues the speed agreement signal N AG2 0 000 to 5 000 s Specifies the off delay timer of the speed agreement signal N AG2 N REF4 Reference speed 4 this detection width the inverter issues the sp
12. 3 Load the battery to the location shown below CN7 on the control printed circuit board gt I HEG ES H e E eh o Amell T ON E EN Figure 7 4 3 Battery Loaded 30 kW or above CN8 132 3 Battery replacement procedure Remove the battery from the inverter in the reverse order of loading and then load a new battery AMCAUTION Before proceeding to the loading procedure be sure to shut down the power Fire or an accident could occur For the calendar clock setting refer to Section 3 2 1 Setting the calendar clock 3 About marine or air transport of a lithium metal battery When transporting a lithium metal battery by itself by packing it in a package of the inverter or by incorporating it in the inverter observe the following notes 1 To transport a lithium metal battery incorporated in the inverter When transporting a panel holding five or more inverters with a built in battery it is necessary to attach the label shown in Figure 7 4 4 and prepare the transportation documents 2 To transport a lithium metal battery packed with the inverter It is necessary to attach the label shown in Figure 7 4 4 and issue a drop test certificate together with the transportation documents To transport a lithium metal battery by air the number of batteries that can be contained in a package of the inverter is limited to the number of batteries required for device operation plus 2
13. A03 q Analog output 3 44 Speed setting 4 MREF4 OV M 4 Analog output common DAY w Data transmission eme BT e Tf Pes ega USB connector lt l 14 Analog output 10 10 Note 1 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 2 Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD ELCB when necessary Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter Note 3 To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect these terminals to the power supply lines Without power supply to these terminals the inverter can run Note 4 Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series Note 5 When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the main circuit terminals P1 and P Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD mode inverters of 55 kW come with a DCR a
14. CN UX red CN UX red Connector configuration Y Peralta O 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz 380 to 398 V 50 Hz 8 Factory default 380 to 430 V 60 Hz 36 b FRN132VG 10 40 to FRN630VG10 40 CN UX red TA CN UX red Connector configuration alo e 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz 380 to 398 V 50 Hz 8 Factory default 380 to 430 V 60 Hz Note The allowable power input voltage fluctuation is within 15 to 10 of the power source voltage E Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for inverters of 37 kW or above 200 V class series and those of 75 kW or above 400 V class series The standard FRENIC VG series accepts DC linked power input in combination with a PWM converter The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above however contain AC driven components such as AC fans To supply AC power to those components exchange the CN R and CN W connectors as shown below and connect the AC power line to the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 For the switching instructions see Figure 2 2 14 and Figure 2 2 15 a FRN37VG10 20 to FRN75VG10 20 FRN75VG10 40 to FRN110VG10 40l CN R red A CN W white Connector configuration ee When not using terminal R1 or T1 When using terminals Rand DI Use conditions Factory default e Feeding the DC linked power e Combined with a PWM converter b FRN90VG10 20 FRN132VG10 40 to FRN630VG10 40 Co
15. HD LD HD D HD LD mo mo Pp Pup a mo 37 FR 55 75 a aa ES Em a ox Be E FRN55VG10 40 ENE Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C 144 Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued AWARNING A Recommended wire size mm Main circuit MCCB or Main power RCD ELCB 1 input 2 L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding BG EJEJEJES pp Esa Pe tee pete ae PPS Ste pS EE ERE 70x2 70x2 70x2 25 300 150x2 150x2 Inverter type Rated current Power supply voltage Aux fan power Nominal applied motor Control circuit Inverter outputs DC reactor Braking resistor Aux control power RN3 7 G10 40l FRN5 5VG10 40 FRN7 5VG10 40 FRN11VG10 40 NI15VG1 0 40 RN18 5VG1 0 40 N22VG 10 40 FRN30VG10 40 FRN37VG10 40 FRN45VG10 40 FRN75VG10 40 Three phase 400 V FRN90VG1 0 40 FRN110VG10 40l FRN132VG1H0 40 EN FRN160VG10 40l FRN200VG10 40l FRN220VG1H0 40 S 3 A am HD 10 HD HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD 7 LD HD D H
16. HD HD 3 HD 4 HD 5 D z ios Nn N FRN75VG1O 20 MEMO 22 METAN 55 75 BR u ER see h FRN30VG10 20 Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination Fl T2 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C 143 Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued AWARNING A Recommended wire size mm Main circuit MCCB or Main power RCD ELCB 1 input 2 L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding BG FESES ECE e Pe tee pete ae PPS Ste pS EE ERE 70x2 70x2 70x2 25 300 150x2 150x2 Inverter type Rated current Power supply voltage Aux fan power Nominal applied motor Control circuit Inverter outputs DC reactor Braking resistor Aux control power RN3 7 G10 40l FRN5 5VG10 40 FRN7 5VG10 40 FRN11VG10 40 NI15VG1 0 40 RN18 5VG1 0 40 N22VG 10 40 FRN30VG10 40 FRN37VG10 40 FRN45VG10 40 FRN75VG10 40 Three phase 400 V FRN90VG1 0 40 FRN110VG10 40l FRN132VG1H0 40 EN FRN160VG10 40l FRN200VG10 40l FRN220VG1H0 40 S 3 A am HD 10 HD HD 2 HD HD HD HD HD 7 LD HD D
17. 61 4 3 3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor Under this control the inverter detects the motor s rotational position speed and magnetic pole position according to feedback signals sent from the speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor for speed control In addition 1t decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants with the speed regulator PI controller A recommended motor for this control is Fuji GNF2 series exclusively designed for vector control E For Fuji GNF2 motor exclusively designed for vector control Configure the function codes as listed below The machinery design values should match your machinery ones For details contact your Fuji Electric representative For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes code PO1 M1 Drive Control 3 Vector control for PMSM 0 Vector control for IM M2 Drive Control with speed sensor and magnetic pole with speed sensor M3 Drive Control ponen sensor 5 V f control for IM 37 Others My Seleehon No modification is required f
18. a FRN90VG10 40 FRN110VG10 40 HD FRN132VG10 40 Three phase 400V FRN160VG10 40 FRN200VG10 40 FRN220VG10 40 FRN280VG10 40 FRN315VG10 40 FRN355VG10 40 FRN400VG10 40 FRN500VG10 40 En HD FRN630VG10 40 ua FS5536 50 07 HD EFL 15G11 4 FS5536 72 07 EFL 22G11 4 o a FS5536 400 99 1 FN3359 600 99 FN3359 800 99 FN3359 600 99 o OS FN3359 1000 99 FN3359 1600 99 Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 139 E Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below When an EMC compliant filter option is externally used 1 Mount the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly clamp the shields to the metal plate to ground them Further connect the shielding layers electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor 2 For connection to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peri
19. lt O lt lt lt lt vewPe 5 5 S a EN lll ll RR lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt z z 2 2 2 lt lt 2 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 2 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt z z 2 2 2 lt 2 2 2 lt 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt 2 lt KIR aa 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 3 S 9 a kkk S OSO Z Remarks Function code E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 485 No g O a 11Dh 121h N N po N o a h h N N m o N al po 127h N 00 po N a gt 12Ah 12Bh 12C 12Dh o 12Eh Communica tions address Name ra 8Ah Terminal Y11 Function h Terminal Y12 Function 8Fh Terminal Y16 Function 90h Terminal Y17 Function h Terminal Y18 Function h Y Terminal Function Normal open close 92h PG Pulse Output Selection h Motor Overheat Early Warning Temperature M1 M3 PTC Activation Level CDh h DB Overload Protection 93h Speed Detection Mode 94h Speed Detection Level 1 Ola a 97h Speed Arrival Detection width 98h Speed Agreement Detection width 99 Off delay timer 9Ah Speed Disagreement Alarm 9Bh Torque Detection Level 1 h Motor Overheat Protection Temperature h Inverter Over
20. lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ES ESE ES 2 lt lt lt lt lt 2 2 lt lt z z lt lt x lt lt lt Ik E SU UON a D a Q O a o N 80 Remarks Function code F59 F60 F61 F62 F63 F64 F65 F66 F67 F68 F69 F70 F72 F73 F74 F75 F76 F77 F78 F79 FERA tions FERA Name Dir 485 Link No No 1 lOor1 LL LCD Monitor Language selection Output Unit HP kW S curve Acceleration 1 S curve Deceleration 1 Pre excitation Mode 0 Item selection Contrast control P gain Integral constant Feedforward gain Input filter Detection filter Output filter 0 ale F57 switches the Running mode screen 0to7 Japanese English German Available soon French Available soon Spanish Available soon Italian Available soon Chinese Korean 1 O Low to 10 High F60 switches the display unit between kW and HP on the LED monitor and LCD monitor for the power consumption F55 6 and input power F55 31 It also switches the display table between kW and HP for motor 1 selection P02 i P control when F62 0 000 N powes O IE 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 005 Y Y Y Y N Y F65 specifies a time constant of the first order delay filter for detected speed 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 002 Y Y Y Y N Y F66 specifies a time constant of the first order delay filter for to
21. 1 Under V f control Check whether decreasing the torque boost P35 A55 A155 decreases the output 4 Excessive torque boost current but does not stall the motor specified in the case of gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the torque boost P35 A55 A155 manual torque boost 110 Possible Causes Under V f control 5 The acceleration deceleration time was too short 6 Malfunction caused by noise Under vector control with without speed sensor 7 The carrier frequency is low Under vector control with without speed sensor 8 Exciting current was too small during auto tuning Under vector control with speed sensor 9 Mismatch between the PG s pulse resolution and the function code setting Under vector control with speed sensor 10 Wrong wiring of the PG Under vector control with speed sensor 11 PG defective 28 07 Heat sink overheat What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque 1s calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 C46 C47 C56 C57 C66 C67 gt Increase the inverter capacity Review the braking method Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Implement noise control measures
22. 16 PID reference value PID REF 10V 20000 d 17 PID correction gain PID G 18 to 24 Custom Ai1 to Ai7 C Al1 to C AI7 25 Main speed setting N REFV 10V Nmax 26 Current input speed setting 4 20 mADC N REFC 10V Nmax 10V 14000 h Data 26 is available only on Ai2 27 PID 27 PID feedback amount 2 PID FB2 10V 20000 d amount 2 PID FB2 10V 20000 Se ore Oe tents 0 to 27 0 to 27 Refer to Terminal Ait Function to Terminal Ai1 Function 0 to 27 Refer to Terminal Ai1 Function Data 26 is available only on Ai2 0 to 27 Refer to Terminal Ai1 Function Data 26 is available Sony on Ai2 0 00 to 60 00 s E65 specifies the duration required when the inverter internal data changes from 0 V to 10 V if the voltage on terminal Ai1 changes from O V to 10 V i EOI ETE for epee an hjUpIDown Limiter aia 1 bowens SSCS 0 00 viv a vivi 87 Drive control c 2 N amp Vit D S Z Z 5 c 0 lt 0 D Z q fe O D e 2 E JS Q eN 9 o O po o S D O Q Y Rae Y 1 Bak Rak EA EA ha ha 0 010 Y 0 010 4 Y Tom vive v vi EC Y Eau XY Yy 0 00 vw 3 YYYY Q o lt lt VC wo PG 2 lt WC tor PEM Se lt lt MY UNA KERU ee Y Y N Y KAACK MONA DA dl MAR UNA KAKARAKA MN MU cee ee ATA MEN KAKARAKA dil KAKARAKA JESAM Y Z lt Za l
23. A AA E 6 Ud Ste e e la a 90 100 00 20109 9 DAVE 9 00 Pen Le Sol Le e cata E EN Oa eae EE Ca e en Se Se ale ele er aaa e e laa Cee mera e ee aa aaa ea a O ca a aa a ela ace ee a Ae ree ta o e ete e apa pais pate ae ee Maa tea ta e Ela Mae ao e ee es een e aa e pe Ama A aa ta Coe Bene e e Ae ae aa pr e e ee a a DOODODODoODocococo oooO om or o ns PA eR ee e ee eee OLOR E orchard coe tales heel loa eho iota a ENE As T OL OL LW 601 0L paadg paadg yuaJno aBeyopA yoedeo we id aia a sa his av ov ov ov i ov 07 en itis ca cao Pails V9ElZ4ND V8LLZ4ND o lag YLI IZJN9 N o st st co N N o wN e ea ea a en e GL YSI IZJN9 VPLIZIND WLOGZANDO VL8lL24IND VS8I 4ND VL9124ND Function code table 1 of Synchronous motor GNF2 VS9124ND V6ElZ4ND WLELZAND Table 4 3 1 V9ELZIND Vel IZJN9 63 Table4 3 2 Function code table 2 of Synchronous motor GNF2 o E CES COC GAE SON e se e CCC Fc RSP ed ee COR eo E A LEAL AL AL LIL Lo EAS A aa LOT W 65 TW Pel II aav COLIW OSI 891 LOIW 99 W GOIV volv c91W 201 W OSI 1er W 081w 601w 821W Le1v cl 2 A pa 19w pod LLH Ceci ZLLH Lim OLIH POLH 2SH cw LW 69w oo rih gw Sov rav cov av es Lev oe ezv ezv zv ozv ey seams ii LLO 91H Z9LH 191H 09LH ISH isa osd Grd Ipd Sbd bvd
24. Disable 0 1 to 20 0 Assuming the maximum speed as 100 0to3 O Pull in by current for IPMSM Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 1 Pull in by current for SPMSM Surface Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 2 Alternate system for IPMSM Available soon 3 Alternate system for IPMSM Available soon 10 to 200 100 Motor rated current 0 1 to 10 0 Hz 0 to 200 0 to 100 N mids l N 0to3 O Pull in by current for IPMSM Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 1 Pull in by current for SPMSM Surface Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 2 Alternate system for IPMSM Available soon 3 Alternate system for IPMSM Available soon 10 to 200 100 Motor rated current 0 1 to 10 0 Hz 0 to 200 0 to 100 N lt lt P 0 to3 O Pull in by current for IPMSM Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 1 Pull in by current for SPMSM Surface Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 2 Alternate system for IPMSM Available soon 3 Alternate system for IPMSM Available soon Remarks Function code H181 H182 H183 H184 H201 H202 H203 H204 H205 H206 H207 H208 H209 H210 H211 H212 H213 H214 H215 H216 H217 H218 H219 H220 H221 H222 Communica tions address Name 485 No Link No h Discrimination Available soon h M3 Alternate Voltage Available soon 1F54h N o o A h Load Adaptive Cont
25. Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to the load circuit secondary side or run the inverter 1 3 3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment 1 Phase advancing capacitors for power factor correction Do not mount a phase advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter s input primary or output secondary circuit Mounting it in the input primary circuit takes no effect To correct the inverter power factor use an optional DC reactor DCR Mounting it in the output secondary circuit causes an overcurrent trip disabling operation An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is assumed to be due to surge current generated by open close of phase advancing capacitors in the power system An optional DC AC reactor DCR ACR is recommended as a measure to be taken at the inverter side Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and phase advancing capacitors on the same power supply line If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DCR ACR to the inverter In some cases it is necessary to insert a reactor in series with the phase advancing capacitors 2 Power supply lines Applica
26. TO Auxiliary power For a backup of the control circuit power supply connect AC power lines same as that input for the control of the main power input circuit Auxiliary power For use in combination with a power regenerative PWM converter RHC series use input for the fans these terminals for an auxiliary power input of the AC fans inside the inverter For 200 V class series of inverters with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above Normally no need to use these terminals Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input The three phase input power lines are connected to these terminals 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned OFF before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and an MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Cip It is recommended to insert a manually operable magnetic contactor MC that allows you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated preventing a failure or accident from causing secondary disas
27. UP DOWN control Multistep Speed 15 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Creeping Speed 2 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 Multistep Speed Agreement Timer 0 000 to 0 100 s When SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 are kept at the same status for the duration specified by this function code the inverter switches the reference speed 0 to 2 0 O to 30000 r min 1 0 00 to 100 00 2 0 0 to 999 9 m min Defines the unit of multistep speed specified by CO5 to C19 When C21 1 the percentage of the maximum speed F03 A06 A106 of the selected motor applies O to 9 0 Keypad VO keys 1 Analog input to terminal 12 0 to 10V 2 Analog input to terminal 12 0 to 10V 3 UP DOWN control Initial speed 0 4 UP DOWN control Initial speed Last value 5 UP DOWN control Initial speed Creep speed 1 or 2 6 DIA card input 7 DIB card input 8 N REFV input to terminal Ai1 9 N REFC input to terminal Ai2 The speed command specified by this function code takes effect when X terminal command N2 N7 is turned ON lt lt lt 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 1 10 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 00 Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 0 000 4 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y 0 0 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switcha
28. ebd zvd eed Ocd eza zd oa Sed vzd YLOZZJN VL8LZ4ND VS8LZ4N9 VL9LZAND VS9LZ3ND V6 123ND VLELZAND V9EIZCAND V381123ND VLILZIND VSIIZ4ND VFlLZ4aN9O VLOZZANDO VL31Z3ND VS812JND VL9LZAND VS9123ND V6 1Z4IND VLELZAND V9ELZIND V8LLZ4ND VLILLZIND VS 1Z3ND Vr 1 LZJN9 EN 64 4 3 4 V f control for IM Under this control the inverter drives a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes E For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control Configure the function codes as listed below The machinery design values should match your machinery ones For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes code PO1 M1 Drive Control AOl M2 Drive Control 5 V f control for IM A101 M3 Drive Control M1 Selection Motor to be applied Motor to be applied P30 M1 Thermistor Type 0 Vector control for IM with speed sensor A31 M2 Thermistor Type TANTE termistor 1 NTC thermistor Specify the thermistor as needed A131 M3 Thermistor Type F04 M1 Rated Speed AOS M2 Rated Speed 1500 r min M3 Rated Speed Rated voltage of nominal M1 Rated Voltage applied motors M2 Rated Voltage M3 Rated Voltage Motor ra
29. 035 to 036 For the OPC VG1 SIU option available soon Lift functions LottoLIS fp User functions U codes U01 to U64 For the UPAC option U101 to U150 For manufacturers SaFety functions SF codes SFOO to SF31 For functional safety For details refer to the Functional Safety card Instruction Manual SOI to S17 Commands Accessible in local mode keypad via Monitoring functions M codes M01 to M222 Data monitor the communications link T Link RS 485 SIU SX bus and fieldbus and via the UPAC Function codes Tables are stated only F H code For details of the other function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Function Codes Tables For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes 76 5 2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code Tables Function code Function code group and code number Address to be used to refer to or change function code data using a communications option Available for all communications options except OPC VG1 TL Communications Address to be used to refer to or change function code data using a communications option address OPC VG1 TL OPC VG1 SX etc Blank link number fields mean that the corresponding function codes cannot be accessed via a field option Name assigned to a function code Number of subdirectories in the keypad directory structure 0 Parent
30. 100 0 Specifies the torque level at the rated speed 1 6 62 5 55 5 50 0 MOI ACI E EI E O E O eee eee z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z q 2 2 z z vewopo laa z 2 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z Pt TXT DK KK d d d d lt lt lt lt lt lt lt vetorrmsm 100 Remarks Change when running Y Communica o tions address jo O O 5 Name Dir Data setting range 5 485 Link 5 No No iL H223 2017h h Multi limit speed pattern 1 0 1 to 100 0 at rated speed x 2 5 Specifies the torque level at the rated speed 2 5 Available soon H224 2018h h Multi limit speed pattern 1 0 1 to 100 0 at rated speed x 3 0 Specifies the torque level at the rated speed 3 0 Available soon H225 2019h h Limit speed discrimination zone 1 0 1 to 100 0 Start speed Specifies the starting speed of the discrimination Available soon zone The rated speed is assumed as 100 H226 201Ah h Limit speed discrimination zone 1 0 1 to 100 0 Completion speed Specifies the end speed of the discrimination zone Available soon The rated speed is assumed as 100 H227 201Bh h Function definition 3 1 0to2 Available soon 0 Calculate the limit speed for winding up and winding down individually 1 Drive winding down operation using the last limited speed result Enable the winding down limit calculation under specific conditions Drive windi
31. 4 appears on the LED monitor g pp Abnormal motor operation gt Go to Section 6 5 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not change 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure 8 The motor abnormally heats up 9 The motor does not run as expected 10 When the motor accelerates or decelerates the speed is not stable 11 The motor stalls during acceleration 12 When the T Link communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command takes effect 13 When the SX bus communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command takes effect 14 When the CC Link communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command takes effect 15 _ under bars appears Problems with inverter settings gt GO to Section 6 5 2 1 Nothing appears on the monitors 2 The desired function code does not appear 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad 4 Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link If any problems persist
32. 4 1 Power ON and check gt See Section 4 2 Select the motor drive control mode gt See Section 4 3 Vector control for IM with speed sensor gt See Section 4 3 1 Vector control for IM without speed sensor See Section 4 3 2 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor See Section 4 3 3 V f control for IM gt See Section 4 3 4 Running the Inverter for Operation Check See Section 4 4 gt Test Run Procedure for IM gt See Section 4 4 1 Test Run Procedure for PMSM gt See Section 4 4 2 Selecting a Speed Command Source gt See Section 4 5 Selecting a Run Command Source gt See Section 4 6 End 54 4 1 Checking Prior to Powering On Check the following before powering on the inverter 1 Check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T and output terminals U V and W Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals G correctly See Figure 4 1 1 AWARNING e Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so and turning the power ON breaks the inverter e Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise an electric shock could occur 2 Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws 4 Check that the
33. 40 FRN315VG10 40 4 gt 200x2 250x2 aa FRN400VG10 40 FRN315V G10 40 FRN355VG 10 40 ES me 450 dR RN355VG10 40 FRN400VG10 40 250x2 FRN500VG10 40 FRN400VGID4D 325x2 E T FRN630VG10 40 FRNSOOVGIO 40 325x33 100 325x3 no gt FRNS0VGIDA T2504 325x4 325x4 Use the crimp terminal model No 38 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 2 When using 150 mm wires for main circuit terminals of FRN55VG10 20 LD mode use CB150 10 crimp terminals designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399 3 Use the crimp terminal model No 8 L6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent Table 2 2 3 Recommended Wire Size Terminals common to all inverters Terminals common to all inverters Recommended wire size mm Remarks Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO pi l 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 400 V class series with 75 kW or above 22 2 Main circuit terminals ss A Charging lamp Figure B Charging lamp 12 AD 12 66 A ARMADOR Tejo LR LZS Ls T DB P4 e 22 22 66165 22 6 6 16 5 22 A Figure C ga D Figure D Figure E 6 6 Charging lamp 2 6 6 23 23 23 23 Jee Charging lamp E SG SG SG SG 23 23 23 23 For Fig D For Fig E For Fig D For Fig E Figure F eee Figure G dha w Charging lamp 6 6 A Charging lamp FOTO ale BG 36 36 36 45 45 45 36 36 36 FOO Li R L2 S L3
34. 7 Select Menu 5 MAINTENANCE in Programming mode and check the main capacitor capacity CAP 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions The inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF This measurement requires setting up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the practical operation using the setup procedure given below e Reference capacitance setup procedure 1 Set bit 0 of function code H104 at 1 User mode to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 0 1 refer to function code H104 2 Turn OFF all run commands 3 Make the inverter ready to be turned OFF under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set function code H80 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor at 1 5 Turn OFF the inverter and the following operations are automatically performed The inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code H80 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved 6 Turn ON the inverter again Confirm that H80 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor hol
35. AWARNING If no zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise a fire could occur When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the invert
36. C67 gt Change the acceleration deceleration time to match the load Measure the output current Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake 1s activated Release the mechanical brake If auto torque boost Function code P35 A55 A155 is enabled check whether the data of P03 P04 P06 P07 and P08 for M1 A02 A03 A08 A09 and A10 for M2 A102 A103 A108 A109 and A110 for M3 matches the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for the motor to be used 116 Possible Causes Under V f control 9 The output frequency does not increase due to the current limiter operation 10 The motor speed does not increase due to the torque limiter operation 11 Incorrect settings of bias and gain for analog input 12 The reference speed did not change Keypad operation Under vector control with speed sensor 13 Wrong wiring of the PG Under vector control with speed sensor 14 Wrong wiring between the inverter and the motor Under vector control with without speed sensor 15 Function code settings do not agree with the motor characteristics What to Check and Suggested Measures Decrease the value of the torque boost Function code P35 A55 A155 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost P35 A55 A155 Check the data of function codes F04 A05 and A105 to ensure that the V f pattern setting
37. F00 0 Check the data of function codes E01 through E09 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O CHECK using the keypad gt Input a WE LK command through a digital input terminal Check that the Full save function was executed H02 1 gt If data of function codes is changed via the communications link execute the Full save function otherwise turning the power OFF loses the changed data Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON Turn OFF both FWD and REV 123 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspections to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a long time When performing inspections follow the instructions given in this chapter AWARNINGA e Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the
38. For a test driving of the motor increase Acceleration Time 1 values so that they are longer than your machinery F07 Note design values If the specified time is short the 5 00 s inverter may not run the motor properly Deceleration Time 1 5 00s Note f LU For the motor parameter auto tuning procedure H01 3 or 4 refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 5 H Codes High performance Functions Function 3 Auto tuning with motor stopped Disabl EN unite peleen 4 Auto tuning with motor rotating OS ote Performing motor parameter auto tuning H01 3 or 4 automatically changes the data of function codes P06 through P11 and P15 through P21 for M1 A08 through A13 and A17 through A23 for M2 and A108 through A113 and A117 through A123 for M3 Be careful with this data change After tuning be sure to perform the full save function H02 1 to save the tuned data into the inverter 59 4 3 2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor Under this control the inverter estimates the motor speed based on the inverter s output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control In addition it controls the motor current and motor torque with quick response and high accuracy under vector control No PG pulse generator is required The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants and using the speed regulator PI controller Applying vector control wit
39. Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 400 V class series with 75 kW to 400 kW 380 to 440 VAC 50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 2 0 A 400 V class series with 500 kW and 630 kW 2 2 6 Control circuit terminals common to all inverter types 1 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes Table 2 2 4 lists the screw specifications and recommended wire size for wiring of the control circuit terminals The control circuit terminals are common to all inverter types regardless of their capacities Table 2 2 4 Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Size Screw specifications A Terminals common to all inverter types Recommended wire size mm Screw size Tightening torque N m Using wires exceeding the recommended sizes may lift the front cover depending upon the number of wires used impeding keypad s normal operation 2 Arrangement of terminals A01 m 12 Ait THC X1 x 2 x3 1x4 x5 cmy __ Y1 FA 30C 304 DX DX 11 M CM EN1 PS EN2 CM JFWD REV CM PGM PGP PA PB e090 0 00 o 00 9 0 0 0 9 0 9 o o s ee o o o9e e ojee r ejeje Reinforce insulation Max 250 VAC Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 28 3 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals AWARNING In general the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage 1 e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire co
40. L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Even if the motor is stopped due to DC braking or preliminary excitation voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur e Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings Run commands e g Run forward FWD stop commands e g Coast to a stop BX and speed change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals modifying the function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or speed command sources with the related terminal commands e g SSI SS2 SS4 SS8 N2 N1 KP PID IVS and LE may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed An accident or injuries could occur Vii Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement AWARNINGA e Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five
41. N N N N N N N N N N o o o o o o o Oo Q o o Q Q o o oO Oo o o o o o O D a E w N gt o TI m J Q w gt 00 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt T gt gt gt gt gt h M3 Pull in Reference Current 1 Available soon h M3 Pull in Frequency 1 10 1 to 10 0 Hz Available soon M3 Reference Current for Polarity g a lt oO control Cc O f w Data setting range N amp E Vit Change when running 10 to 200 100 Motor rated current 1 0 0 to 200 0 Enable H51 H64 H65 Disable H202 H213 1 Disable H51 H64 H65 Enable H202 H213 N N N N Y D m a Q co a z z z z a a i d d d SS d d d d RARAS d d d AO d d k k z z z z vewrpe N lt N 0 001 YININTY D a 0 0 5 amp a lt a Roae l gt gt 38 8 8 gt lt lt Sl Al Sl a Y 1 00 YININTY Y lt E E A OA A SA AE RS RA E E ki Y N N Y 0 001 to 50 000 kg m Y Y N N Y Applies to winding up operation when AN P2 1 is ON The magnification is switchable by H228 Z f 2 o 2 o o lt 1 10 50 to 1 20 Applies to winding up operation when AN P2 1 is ON 0 001 S on 2 1 00 0 500 0 001 o o 0 500 0 Enable H60 Disable H215 H224 1 Disable H60 Enable H215 H224 100 0 on S o 0 1 to 100 0 Specifies the torque level at the rated speed 1 2 83 3 71 4 0 1 to
42. Off STO is activated ooooooooocccncnnncnccononononononnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnan nono nono 155 8 4 5 EL F alarm caused by logic discrepancy and inverter output Stat ooninnnnnininnnnananinincncnoncnncnanon conan nonanncncnos 156 8 4 6 Prevention of eS AO anio oleo cabe rico ciceSa 157 E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual A W ARN N G Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries AC AU TI O N Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application AWARNING e The FRENIC VG is designed to drive a three phase motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur The FRENIC VG may not be used for a life supp
43. S on le o O N i Feedforward gain Input filter Detection filter Output filter gain I gain 1 0 000 to 10 000 s P control when C41 0 000 in Acceleration Time 4 Deceleration Time 4 S curve 4 Start side S curve 4 End side Y 0 01 to 99 99 s Y 5 00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 0 01 to 99 99 s Y 5 00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s EOS _ o vivo yyy lt 1 1 lt lt ASR Switching Time o fooow2858 SY o era vv INT JACCIDEC Switching Speed 0 oooto 000 SS poo eva vv ASR Switching Time o oooror0o00 poo eva h Creep Speed Switching under UP DOWN control lt lt 00 to 11 Creep Speed 1 Creep Speed 2 0 Function code setting C18 C19 1 Analog input CRP1 CRP2 oz ANNAN 91 Remarks 5 3 4 P codes Motor Parameter Functions M1 Communica 2 Drive o tions address o o 5 control 8 2 5 amp 5 o O Ay gt 5 gt gt f 5 P alu 0 5 O Name Dir Data setting range S N Q a 5 485 Link a a Ep E 3 lt s a No No O 2 8 Sl5 713 g gt 1 gt o O gt P01 301h h M1 Drive Control 0to5 N YIN 55 Y Y Y Y 0 Vector control for IM with speed sensor 1 Vector control for IM without speed sensor 2 Simulation mode 3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor 4 5 V control for IM P02 302h h M1 Motor
44. Selection 26 0 to 50 N YIN 82 Y Y Y Y Display kW HP changes by setting F60 0 to 35 Settings for VG dedicated motors Data at F04 F05 and P03 to P27 are automatically set and write protected P OTHER P OTR on the keypad Data at F04 F05 and P03 to P27 are write protected and cannot be overwritten OTHER Data at F04 F05 and PO3 to P27 are write protected and cannot be overwritten Settings for the motor only for FRENIC VG 8 series Data at F04 F05 and PO3 to P27 are automatically set and write protected For the relationship between the setting data and the motor type refer to List of Applicable Motors in Section 5 3 4 P02 codes P03 303h A7h M1 Rated Capacity 1 For inverters of 400 kW or below N il YIN 3 Y Y Y Y 0 00 to 500 00 kW when F60 0 0 00 to 600 00 HP when F60 1 For inverters of 500 kW or above 13 0 00 to 1200 kW when F60 0 0 00 to 1600 HP when F60 1 For multiwinding motors set the motor capacity per wiring P04 304h A8h M1 Rated Current 1 10 01 to 99 99 A N id Y N 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 A 1000 to 2000 A PO5 305h M1 Number of Poles 2 to 100 poles P08 308h ACh M1 Exciting Current Magnetic Flux 1 10 01 to 99 99 A Y YIN 13 Y Y Y Y Weakening Current Id 100 0 to 999 9 A 1000 to 2000 A PO9 309h ADh M1 Torque Current 1 10 01 to 99 99 A Y gt YINI 13 Y Y N Y 100 0 to 999 9 A 1000 to 2000 A P10 30Ah M1 Slip Frequency For driving 0 001 to 10 000 Hz P11 30Bh For braking 0 001
45. Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Injury may occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code or the light alarm indication 4 is displayed on the LED monitor e Ifan alarm code appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 6 3 e Ifthe light alarm indication 2 4 appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 6 4 e If neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication 1
46. V 2 Connect an external potentiometer to terminals 11 through 13 of the inverter 3 Rotate the external potentiometer to apply voltage to terminal 12 for a speed command input L For precautions in wiring refer to Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER L For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET 74 4 6 Selecting a Run Command Source A run command source is the keypad w keys by factory default 4 6 1 Setting up a run command from the keypad Follow the procedure given below 1 Configure the function codes as listed below 0 Keypad 60 8 60 keys 0 Keypad 60 60 keys 2 Press the key to run the motor in the forward direction Press the key to stop it 3 Press the key to run the motor in the reverse direction Press the key to stop it For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET 4 6 2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals terminals FWD and REV Follow the procedure given below 1 Configure the function codes as listed below Functi F02 Operation Method 1 External digital input signal 0 Keypad 9 s Eo keys If terminal FWD and REV are ON the F02 data cannot be c
47. V f control for IM Frequency control Section 4 3 4 4 3 1 Vector control for IM with speed sensor Under vector control the inverter detects the motor s rotational position and speed according to PG feedback signals and uses them for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants with the speed regulator PI controller This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector control without speed sensor A recommended motor for this control is a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control CNote Vector control regulating the motor current requires some voltage margin between the voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor Usually a general purpose motor is so designed that the voltage matches the commercial power Under the control therefore it is necessary to suppress the motor terminal voltage to the lower level in order to secure the voltage margin required However driving the motor with the motor terminal voltage suppressed to the lower level cannot generate the rated torque even if the rated current originally specified for the motor is applied To ensure the rated torque it is necessary to review the rated current This also applies to vector control w
48. VC for pms 51h h Offset for Speed Setting on 3 30000 to 30000 r min Terminal 12 F81 specifies the offset speed adjustment for analog speed setting on terminal 12 82 Remarks 5 3 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Communica tions address Name 485 Link No No E01 101h Terminal X1 Function Function code Dir Data setting range 13 0 to 79 0 1 2 3 Select multistep speed 1 to 15 steps 0 SS1 1 SS2 2 SS4 3 SS8 4 5 Select ASR and ACC DEC time 4 steps 4 RT1 5 RT2 16 Switch creep speed under UP DOWN control CRP N2 N1 17 UP Increase speed UP 18 DOWN Decrease speed DOWN 19 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 26 Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM 27 Synchronous operation command PG PR optional function SYC 30 Cancel speed limiter N LIM Related codes F76 F77 F78 31 Cancel H41 Torque command H41 CCL 32 Cancel H42 Torque current command H42 CCL 34 Cancel F40 Torque limiter mode 1 F40 CCL 42 Zero hold Ai3 AIO optional function ZH Al Q 48 Inverse PID output PID INV 51 Hold Ai torque bias H TB 52 STOP1 STOP1 Decelerate to stop with normal deceleration time 53 STOP2 STOP2 Decelerate to stop with deceleration time 4 54 STOP3 STOP3 Decelerate to stop with max braking torque ignoring the deceleration time setting 55 Latch DIA data DIA optional function DIA 56 Latch DIB data DIB
49. When the 010 data is increased Figure 4 4 3 Adjustment of Magnetic Pole Position Cote If the PG alarm occurs during adjustment it 1s possible that the connection of the PG is incorrect Check the wiring of the PG 72 3 Test run 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference speed is r min and it is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Set a low reference speed such as r min using N Q keys Check that the speed is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Set the maximum speed F03 to 750 r min 4 Shift the LCD monitor to Menu 3 OPR MNTR to show the speed Nx N 5 To run the motor in the forward direction press the key to run it in the NI EEA AR Re mM NR XXXXX Xr m reverse direction press the key i ae g i g a Check that AV gt PAGE SHI FEE e The speed on the LED monitor comes ON instead of blinking The motor accelerates up to the specified speed e There is no abnormal discrepancy between the reference speed N and the detected speed N shown on the LCD monitor 6 Press the key to stop the motor 7 If no alarm occurs or no problem is found in motor running increase the speed with the Y Y keys 8 Turn the run command OFF lt Check points during a test run gt e Check that the motor is running in the forward direction when it is driven with the key e Check that the motor is running in the reverse direction when it is driven with the key e Check for smooth rotation witho
50. acceleration deceleration times gt Correct the RTI and RT2 settings 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F14 is either 0 1 or 2 2 The run command remains OFF even after the power has been restored What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip 1 L occurs gt Change the data of F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 3 4 or 5 Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O CHECK using the keypad Refer to Section 3 4 4 5 gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command ON In 3 wire operation the power to the control printed circuit board control PCB has been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure time or the HOLD signal Enable 3 wire operation has been turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after the power has been restored 8 The motor abnormally heats up Possible Causes 1 Airflow volume of the motor s cooling fan decreased due to the service life expired or failure Under V f control 2 Excessive torque boost specified What to Check and Suggested Measures Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally gt Ask your Fuji Electr
51. after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 103 6 3 Ifan alarm code appears on the LED monitor 6 3 1 List of alarm codes If the inverter detects an alarm check whether any alarm code appears on the 7 segment LED monitor of the keypad As listed below some alarm codes are followed by alarm sub codes that denote the detailed error causes For alarm codes not followed by alarm sub codes is written in the table below For the alarm sub code checking procedure refer to Section 3 4 4 8 Reading alarm information Menu 7 ALM INF For alarm codes followed by alarm sub codes listed as For particular manufacturers inform your Fuji Electric representative of the alarm sub code also when contacting or asking him her to repair the inverter isn LC CU L L LILII I Table 6 3 1 Braking transistor broken Braking resistor overheated DC fuse blown DC fan locked Excessive positioning deviation PG communication error Functional safety circuit fault Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects Alarm sub Description Detailed error cause If a breakdown of the braking transistor 1s detected this protective function stops the inverter output Available for braking transistor built in inverters If this alarm is detected be sure to shut down the power on the primary side of the inverter This function estimates the temperatu
52. and CMY Not electrically isolated from terminal CM but not equivalent voltage 1 This outputs pulse generator signals with frequency divided to 1 n where n is programmable with Function code E29 2 Switchable between open collector and complementary equivalent to the voltage on the PGP terminal transistor outputs For switching refer to Section 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches Sary lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt a Open collector output Figure 2 2 12 Pulse Output Circuit b Complementary output Output voitage Output volage v Open collector output Max output current isma Hi tevetompar Peavy gt o Low teve omar av Max output current ma Output voltage Complementary output CM Pulse generator Common terminal for FA and FB output common 34 Table 2 2 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Functions TH 1 NTC PTC Monitors the motor temperature with NTC or PTC thermistor thermistor For a PTC thermistor the motor overheat protection level can be specified with connection Function code E32 THC Common Common terminal for NTC and PTC thermistors Electrically isolated from terminals CM PGM and CMY 4 Wiring for control circuit terminals for inverters of 75 kW 200 V class series and those of 132 630 kW 400 V class series For FRN75VG10 20 FRN90VG10 20 and FRN132VG10 40
53. batteries PUT MM MA ES N CAUTION h N Ba p h W DAMAGED h R h Lithium metal battery DO NOT LOAD OR TRANSPORT PACKAGE IF DAMAGED For more wvtormation call 5703 527 3857 1 400 424 9900 USA domestic ory k MA AAA ESE EE 4 4 A A 4 a N 120x110 mm Figure 7 4 4 Label to be Attached to Outer Wrapping For details contact your shipping company 133 7 5 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit contain harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 5 1 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and use the following formula E Three phase input Electric power W Power factor V3 x Voltage V x Current A Table 7 5 1 g D Input primary side E Voltage Current aS BA VV D D Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter SE AR AS AT VR VS VT WR WT Oo rally eae Rectifier or Digital v 2 oving iron a 29 E moving iron AC power a E p type meter EE EE ns Figure 7 5 1 x 100 Met
54. command PID feedback amount and PID output process command Display value Command or feedback value x Display coefficient A B B o o N 1 00 s el s k vewe q4 lt p VE wo PG zit lt o XX lt lt PR PR VC for PMSM for PMSM o Detected speed 1 or Reference speed 4 r min switchable with F56 1 Reference speed 4 ASR input r min 2 Output frequency after slip compensation Hz Reference torque current AJo Reference torque Calculated torque Power consumption Motor output kW or HP switchable with F60 12 Motor temperature C oO oO OO COIN When no NTC thermistor is used appears 13 Load shaft speed r min Detected or commanded switchable with F56 14 Line speed m min Detected or commanded switchable with F56 The following data will be hidden depending upon the mode or options 20 PID command 21 PID feedback amount 22 PID output 3 Option monitor 1 HEX 24 Option monitor 2 HEX 5 Option monitor 3 DEC N N 26 Option monitor 4 DEC 2 Input watt hour x 100 kWh Oor1 0 Reference speed 1 Detected speed WD aj aaa F56 switches the display data between the reference speed and detected one when the motor stops It applies to the speed F55 0 the load shaft speed F55 13 and the line speed F55 14 ES lt lt
55. cool and dark place and energized approximately once a year 3 Cooling fans and battery can be replaced by users As for other parts only the persons who have finished the Fuji Electric training course can replace them For the purchase of spare cooling fans and battery and the request for replacement of other parts contact the sales agent where you purchased the product or your nearest Fuji Electric representative 7 4 1 Judgment on service life The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the voltage applied time etc The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life The life prediction function can also issue early warning signals if the life time alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals Refer to Section 3 4 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 MAINTENANCE Table 7 4 2 lists the parts whose service life can be predicted and details the life prediction function The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the surrounding temperature and other usage environments Table 7 4 2 Life Prediction Object of life Prediction function End of life criteria Prediction timing 3 MAINTENANCE prediction on the LCD monitor DC link bus Measurement of discharging time 85 or lower of t
56. devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 See Note below 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter s power wires Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 See Note below 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For inverter s control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any Note Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM at a low carrier frequency may heat the permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics resulting in demagnetization When decreasing the carrier frequency setting be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor 1 3 5 Leakage current A high frequency current component
57. generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occurs take an appropriate measure against them An earth leakage circuit 1 Decrease the carrier frequency See Note above breaker that is connected 2 Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter lo the input primary side 3 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker with lower sensitivity than the one currently used has tripped es i 4 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency With overcurrent protection current component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay 1 Decrease the carrier frequency See Note above was falsely activated 2 Increase the current setting of the thermal relay 3 Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter instead of the external thermal relay Note Running a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM at a low carrier frequency may heat the permanent magnet due to the output current harmonics resulting in demagnetization When decreasing the carrier frequency setting be sure to check the allowable carrier frequency of the motor 1 3 6 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM When using a PMSM note the following e When using a PMSM other than the Fuji standard s
58. keep the pulse width of the OFF signal 1 ms or less When using the functional safety card OPC VG1 SAFE keep the jumper bars mounted between terminals EN1 EN2 and PS since those terminals cannot be used For the Safe Torque Off STO function use terminals ST1 and ST2 on the functional safety card Note for Safe Torque Off STO When configuring the product safety system with this Safe Torque Off STO function make a risk assessment of not only the external equipment and wiring connected to terminals EN1 and EN2 Enable input 1 and Enable input 2 but also the whole system including other equipment devices and wiring against the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer under the manufacturer s responsibility in order to confirm that the whole system conforms to the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer In addition as preventive maintenance the machinery manufacturer must perform periodical inspections to check that the product safety system properly functions To bring the inverter into compliance with Functional Safety Standard it is necessary to install the inverter on a control panel with the enclosure rating of IP54 or above To bring the inverter into compliance with Functional Safety Standard it is necessary to bring it into compliance with European Standards IEC EN61800 5 1 and IEC EN61800 3 This Safe Torque Off STO function coasts the motor to a stop When a mechanica
59. of 55 kW or below for 200 V class series and those of 160 kW or below for 400 V class series 1 Connect an optional DBR to terminals P and DB 2 Arrange the DBR and inverter so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two DBR wires or route them together in parallel A WARNING When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Otherwise a fire could occur DC link bus terminals P and N Capacity Braking Built in DC braking kW resistor DBR Optional devices Devices and terminals 75 to 90 200 V Braking unit 200 to 630 DC braking resistor DBR 400 V Inverter Braking unit P and N 1 Connecting an optional braking unit or DC braking resistor DBR Inverters of 75 kW or above 200 V class series and those of 200 kW or above 400 V class series require both a braking unit and DBR Connect the terminals P and N of a braking unit to those on the inverter Arrange the inverter and the braking unit so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel Next connect the terminals P and DB of a DBR to those on the braking unit Arrange the braking unit and DBR so that the wiring length comes to 10 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel For details about the wiring refer to the Braking Unit Instruction Manual 1 5 m or less i i 10 m or less
60. of a DCR these inverters cannot run Connect a jumper bar or DCR correctly Repair or replace wires to the DCR Check the reference speed setting made on the keypad gt Modify the reference speed setting by pressing f key Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command Check whether the setting of function code P05 A07 or A107 No of poles matches the number of poles of the actual motor gt Set the data of P05 A07 or A107 to the correct number of poles 115 Possible Causes Under vector control with speed sensor 18 Wrong wiring between the motor and pulse generator PG Under vector control with without speed sensor 19 Incorrect setting of the torque limiter level Under vector control with without speed sensor 20 Incorrect setting of the torque command Under vector control with speed sensor 21 Mismatch between the PG s pulse resolution and the function code setting 22 The magnetic pole position of the permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM is out of place What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor wiring phase sequence and the polarity of the PG gt Correct the wiring Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 2 Mounting direction of a PG pulse generator and PG signals Check whether the torque limiter level Function code F44 F45 is set to zero 0 gt Modify
61. of the inverter unit E When employing external cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the panel The external cooling therefore significantly reduces heat radiating inside the equipment or panel To employ external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below use the mounting adapter for external cooling option for those with a capacity of 30 kW or above simply change the positions of the mounting bases For the dimensional outline drawing of the mounting adapter option refer to FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 8 Section 8 5 8 ACAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 12 Figure 2 1 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances External heat radiation 70 Internal S heat T radiation a oo 30 Internal temperature of the panel Max 50 C Internal air intake External air intake Figure 2 1 2 External Cooling To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above change the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as shown in Figure 2 1 3 Screws differ in size and count for each inverter Refer to
62. optional function DIB 83 Z Change when running D 0 o 5 g 0 a D gt 2 Q O a Y c 2 N amp Drive control Format type Vif lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt vowPc El lt lt lt lt _ lt lt vewopo lt lt lt REE vo or Pms EJE EST RIRE lt lt lt lt Remarks Function code Z o 5 m o E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 Communica tions address 485 Link No 101h 78 79 7F 82 Oo m a gt 10Fh 85 Name h Terminal X1 Function h Terminal Terminal X2 Function Function h Terminal X8 Function 81h Terminal X11 Function h Terminal X12 Function Terminal X13 Function Terminal X14 Function X Terminal Function Normal open close 80h Terminal X9 Function h h Terminal Y1 Function 13 Data setting range 57 Cancel multiplex system MT CCL 58 67 Custom Di1 Di10 C DI1 to C DI10 68 Select load adaptive parameters 2 1 AN P2 1 Available soon 69 Cancel PID components PID CCL 70 Enable PID FF component PID FF 71 Reset completion of speed limit calculation NL RST Available soon 78 Switch PID feedback signals PID 1 2 79 Select PID torque bias TB PID 80 Tune magnetic pole position MP TUN Available soon 0 to 79 See Terminal X1 Function boo
63. or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO to the power supply lines If a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the inverter s primary circuit connect the primary circuit of the MC to these terminals RO and TO Terminal rating 200 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 22 kW or below 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 30 kW or above 380 to 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 0 5 A 400 V class series N dale When introducing a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB C connect its output secondary side to terminals RO and TO Connecting its input primary side to those terminals causes the RCD ELCB to malfunction since the input power voltage to the inverter is three phase but the one to terminals RO and TO is single phase To avoid such problems be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown in Figure 2 2 3 Residual current operated protectice devide P1 P Earth leakage AC reactor circuit breaker Radio noise filter Magnetic Power supply Noise filter contactor i Insulation gt transformer Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Power supply for inverter control Figure 2 2 3 Connection Example of Residual current operated Protective Device RC
64. power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise an electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points The following is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory defaults 1 Check that the LED monitor displays indicating that the reference speed is 0 r min that is blinking See Figure 4 2 1 If the LED monitor displays any number except Li press y key to set 2 Check that the built in cooling fans rotate Figure 4 2 1 Display of the LED Monitor at Power on 4 2 1 Checking the input state of PG pulse generator signals Before proceeding to a test run of the inverter rotate the motor shaft and check the digital input state of PG pulse generator signals on the screen shown below To call up the screen switch the inverter operation mode from the Running mode to the Programming mode select Menu 4 I O CHECK on the menu screen and select page 15 shown below using the W V keys For detailed operation procedure refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 5 SD XxXXXXXPYs 4 PG SD signal input info inverter or option LD XxXxXXXXPYs PG LD signal input info option PR xXXXXPYs lt PG PR signal input info option PD EXXXXXPY s PG PD signal input info option AV gt PAGE SHIF Eg When
65. resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the jump speed C01 through C04 to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance gt Specify the observer H47 through H52 H125 through H127 to suppress vibration Depending on the characteristics of the load this may take no effect gt Decrease the P gain of the auto speed regulator ASR F61 C40 C50 C60 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time Possible Causes 1 The inverter runs the motor with S curve acceleration deceleration What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F67 through F70 S curve acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern F67 through F70 0 gt Decrease the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 C46 C47 C56 C57 C66 C67 118 Possible Causes Under V f control 2 The current limiting operation prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration 3 Overload Under V f control 4 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 5 An external potentiometer is used for speed setting 6 Motor torque generated is limited by the torque limiter 7 The specified acceleration or deceleration time was incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the acceleration time and torque boost are proper
66. service life expired or failure Sub code 0001 to 0008 Sub code 0010 to 0200 What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged Clean the heat sink For the cleaning procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 MAINTENANCE gt Replace the cooling fan Contact your Fuji Electric representative Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally Replace the cooling fan Contact your Fuji Electric representative 111 Possible Causes 4 Overload Sub code 0001 to 0008 29 0547 External alarm What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current Reduce the load Use the heat sink overheat early warning INV OH E15 through E27 or the inverter overload early warning INV OL E15 through E27 to reduce the load before the overload protection is activated gt Decrease the data of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency Problem External alarm was inputted THR when the Enable external alarm trip THR has been assigne
67. specifications e Input impedance 10kQ e The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is regarded as 10 VDC Analog input 1 1 Analog input voltage from external equipment Analog input 2 Possible to assign various signal functions Input signal off Auxiliary speed setting 1 Torque limiter level 1 etc selected with Function codes E49 and E50 to these terminals For details refer to Chapter 5 Function Codes 2 Hardware specifications Only for terminal A12 the input is switchable between voltage and current with the SW3 configuration For details about slide switches refer to Section 2 3 11 To use terminal A12 for current input speed setting N REFC turn SW3 to the I position set FO1 or C25 to 9 and set E50 to 26 After that check that the current input is normal on the I O check screen given in Section 3 4 4 5 Voltage input e Input impedance 10kQ e The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is regarded as 10 VDC Current input only on terminal A12 e Input impedance 2500 e The maximum input is a maximum of 30 mADC however the current higher than 20 mADC is regarded as 20 mADC 11 Analog input Common for analog input signals 12 Ail and A12 M common Isolated from terminals CM CMY and PGM 5 a en foe lt 29 5 a T oP A Table 2 3 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the C
68. speed command from the Key Pad escoria idilio alaba 74 4 5 2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer ooccccnoooccncnnnnonononnnnnnononnnnnonccnnonnnnnnnnnconannnnnnnnnnnnns 74 4 6 Selecting a Run Command Source A E 75 4 6 1 Setting up a run command from the keypad ssossessssenessssssseesessssssreeesssssreesssssereressssseerresssssseeesssssererssssssrrreesss 75 4 6 2 Setting up a run command with digital input signals terminals FWD and REV ooer 75 Chapter o PUNC TION CODES o adi Ra E n Eee E EEOSE 76 5 1 Function Code Groups and Function Cd le leiue ccacsssstitensnnbsslenanadsbunsaeseesseiruiecceetesanteasaeee maulbunsacbothen 76 5 2 About the Contents of Column Headers in Function Code Tables oooooccccccnccnnonononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanananan ono nnos 77 53 Funcion Code AMM e nn E A 78 5 3 1 F codes Fundamental LUCIANA A A AA A 78 5 3 2 E codes Extension Termina lt UCLIOMS a eo a E 83 5 3 3 CES Control PUNCHONS 90 5 3 4 P codes Motor Parameter Functions Md e dies od 92 5 3 5 H codes High PEO iia 94 5 3 6 A codes Alternative Motor Parameter Functions M2 M3 occcccnnnnnnnnoooooooonnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnns 101 5 3 7 O cod s Option Functions AAA LA EEEo e RIRAL EEEL UAE E ASETE i EEEE 101 5 3 8 E codes Lift Functions eissira erra riedi aaa yx aaan aE EE EEEE aea r Eaa ii EELEE 101 53 9 SE codes Safety FUNCIONS A A aaa eaaa EEEE a TEE EA Aa a eE E 101 Chapte
69. supply Aux control power supply Aux fan power supply Aux Fan power supply 60 C Cu wire 75 C Cu wire 60 C Cu wire 75 C Cu wire 300x2 350x2 152x2 y 177x2 FRN220VG10 40 a 28 203x2 203x2 I FRN280VG10 40 127x2 152x2 31 300x2 350x2 FRN315VG10 40 H 152x2 177x2 RN280VG10 40 L 800 400x2 400x2 355 FRN315VG10 40 2032 2032 14 14 R 424 7 10 6 10 6 F F F 1200 2 1 2 1 N355VG10 40 48 1 1 2 1 1 2 g 0 0 5 FRN315VG10 40 500x2 x 500x2 9 2 2 400 FRN355V G10 40 253x2 3 253x2 S FRN400VG10 40 aso RNENCIOAD 0 0 Els HD MD LD mode gt D D oO N Ss a oO oO fat Me ER o e 600x2 600x2 304x2 304x2 FRN400VG10 40 TE Tee 1600 177 3 203x3 RN500VG10 40 Ae 2000 1400 253x3 304x3 FRN630VG10 40 6003 500x4 2200 1600 304x3 253x4 Note 1 Control circuit terminals Tightening torque 6 1 1b in 0 7 N m Recommended wire size AWG16 1 25 mm E EEE Oi g OT Note 2 A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the specifications No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 It is showing the wire size for UL Open Type See additional material INR SI47 1365 for UL Enclosed Type Pack with TYPE1 kit FRN45 5SVGIS 2J FRN75 160 200 220 355 400 VG1S 2J are not conform to C22 2No 14 If you need it contact your Fuji Electric representative 150 8 3 Compliance wit
70. switch Table 2 2 6 Function of Each Slide Switch Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE This switches the input mode of digital input terminals X1 to X9 FWD and REV to be used as the SINK or SOURCE mode Factory default SINK SW2 Reserved for particular manufacturers Switches the input mode of the analog input terminal A12 between voltage and current Voltage input Factory default Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port 2 on the terminal block ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 2 for connecting the keypad If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW4 to ON Reserved for particular manufacturers Switches the output voltage of terminal PGP between 12 V and 15 V Select the voltage level that matches the power voltage of the pulse generator to be connected 15 V Factory default Switch the output mode of terminals FA and FB between open collector output and complementary output SW7 SW8 Terminal FA Terminal FB Open collector output Factory default 39 2 3 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 3 1 Parts required for connection To mount a keypad on a place other than an inverter the parts listed below are needed Extension cable Note 1 CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 types available in length of 5 m 3 m and 1 m M3 x O Note 2 Two screws needed To be p
71. the magnetic flux command is 37 5 0 0 to 100 0 Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 31 25 Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 25 0 0 to 100 0 Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 18 75 18 8 D c a Q co a Oo oza a za a IES ES ES ES TES ES ES ES k P lt kdi i di dl d d a ES ES ES ES ES TES ES INTA Oo oz za za a INES ES ES Kf VE wo PS Esa cal a 2 a A a A O O HA Oa A E Pt KE for PS 98 Remarks Function code T 7 N g H117 H118 H125 H126 H127 H134 H135 H136 H137 H138 H140 H141 H142 H144 H145 H146 H147 H148 H149 H160 H161 H162 H163 H164 H170 H171 H172 H173 H174 H180 Communica tions address 485 No aja gt njn ala gt o F25h F26h _ _ d T N N N 5 F28h 5 N a gt F2Ch F2Dh T wo o gt 1F31h 1F3Ch mb ad m1 7 NIN mmnm s 5 Link No h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h Start Delay Name M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 11 M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 12 Observer Mock Alarm h Toggle Data Error Timer Backstop for Vector Control without Speed Sensor Lower limit frequency operation Lower limit f
72. the LED monitor This simultaneous keying toggles between the ordinary running mode and jogging mode The current mode appears on the corresponding indicator This simultaneous keying toggles between the remote and local modes The current mode appears on the corresponding indicator 0 E gt A Q This simultaneous keying jumps the cursor to the preceding following function code group F to M in selecting a function code Starts running the motor in the forward rotation Starts running the motor in the reverse rotation LED Operation keys Stops the motor Switches the screen to the operation guide display prepared for each operation mode or to the menu function guide display of Lights when the inverter is running 46 Details of Indicator Indexes Hz A V r min m min kW X10 minsec VG5 Vv v Vv v v Yy Vv Vv Vv v v Indicators for the unit of number on the LED monitor Indicators for the running status and run command source FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND AO CTI a pa ant SSCS Ov CTN er LED Remote mode Run command and speed command sources selected by F02 and F01 In the remote mode a run command entered via the communications link takes effect This indicator goes off when H30 2 or 3 LOC Local mode Run command and speed command sources from the keypad independent of the setting of F02 and F01 Run command Via keypad This indicator lights also in local mode or in remote mod
73. the hook held down as directed by the arrows in Figure 2 3 4 Figure 2 3 4 Removing a Keypad 2 Put the keypad in the original slot while engaging its bottom latches with the holes as shown below and push it onto the case of the inverter arrow 2 while holding it downward against the terminal block cover arrow D Latches A Figure 2 3 5 Mounting the Keypad 41 E Mounting the keypad on the panel 1 Cut the panel out for a single square area and perforate two screw holes on the panel wall as shown in Figure 2 3 6 Unit mm Depth 11 CREER m aaa a a q a FWO REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND Tp x 2 Screw hol provided by oe the customer Outer F Inside the panel surface of panel 1 2 to 2 3 If the thickness of the panel is outside the range specified here use screws of o Lf an appropriate length ej E Panel cutout ej Back view y E 80 58 10 5 md _ L 53 8 15 2 128 5 194 6 3 4 ENEN wee 2xD4 9 5 Yue 6l 1L9 5 Dimensions of panel cutting viewed from A Figure 2 3 6 Location of Screw Holes and Dimension of Panel Cutout 42 2 Mount the keypad on the panel wall with 2 screws as sh
74. the motor characteristics What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F03 A06 or A106 Maximum speed gt Modify the data of F03 A06 or A106 to the appropriate value Check the setting of the speed limiter F76 to F78 gt Modify the data of F76 to F78 to the appropriate value Check whether the reference speed has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Increase the reference speed gt Inspect the external speed command potentiometers signal converters switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 A11 and A12 correctly Check whether the reference speed has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals X1 through X9 gt Correct the data of E01 to E14 gt Correct the data of C05 to C21 Multistep speed settings Referring to the speed command block diagram given in the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 check the data of the relevant function codes and what speed commands are being received using Menu 2 DATA CHECK and Menu 4 I O CHECK with the keypad Correct any incorrect data of function codes e g cancel the higher priority reference speed Check the settings of the acceleration time and deceleration time function codes F07 F08 C35 C36 C46 C47 C56 C57 C66 and
75. the motor may run out of control An accident or injuries may result After completion of preparations for a test run as described above start running the inverter for motor operation check using the following procedure ACAUTION If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and investigate the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 4 1 Test Run Procedure for Induction Motor IM 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference speed is r min and it is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Set a low reference speed such as r min using N Q keys Check that the speed is blinking on the LED monitor 3 To run the motor in the forward direction press the key to run it in the reverse direction press the key Check that the speed is lit on the LED monitor 4 Press the key to stop the motor lt Check points during a test run gt e Check that the motor is running in the forward direction when it is driven with the key e Check that the motor is running in the reverse direction when it is driven with the key e Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the or key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference speed using N Y keys Check the above points again 67 4 4 2 Test Run Procedure for Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor PM
76. the table below For the panel cutting size refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 3 External Dimensions Table 2 1 2 Screw Size Count and Tightening Torque Base fixi Case fixi Tightening fnveraetype ase fixing screw ase fixing screw porque Screw size and q ty Screw size and q ty N m FRN30VG10 20 FRN37VG10 20 M6 x20 M6 x 20 FRN30VG10 40 to FRN55VG1 0 40 gt Pcs for upper side 2 pes for upper side 3 pcs for lower side FRN45VG10 20 FRN55VG10 20 M6 x 20 M6 x 12 FRN75VG1 0 40 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 pes for upper side FRN75VG10 20 M5 x12 M5 x 12 FRN90VG10 40 FRN110VG10 40 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side FRN132VG10 40 FRN160VG10 40 MS 16 ei 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side FRN90VG1 0 20 M5 x 16 M5 x 16 FRN200VG10 40 FRN220VG10 40 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs for upper side MS x 16 FRN280VG10 40 FRN315VG10 40 2 pes each for upper and lower sides 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides FRN355VG10 40 FRN400VG10 40 M6 x 20 M6 x 20 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides M8 x 20 M8 x 20 eo hea 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 1 Remove all of the base fixing screws and the case fixing screws from the top of the inverter 2 Move the top mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it to the case fixing screw holes with the base fixing screws
77. the terminal X1 is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Digital input 2 Digital input 4 Digital input 6 Digital input 7 Digital input circuit specifications Digital input 8 lt Control circuit gt MR Item Min Max Daami 10 le Ma Operating voltage ON level 0V 2V SINK OFF level Operating voltage ON level Operating current at ON Input voltage is at 0 V 4 5 mA Allowable leakage current at 7 NES Figure 2 2 7 Digital Input Circuit 30 Table 2 2 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Functions EN 1 Enable input 1 When EN1 PS or EN2 PS is opened OFF the inverter output transistor stops EN2 its operation Safe Torque Off STO To enable the STO function remove the jumper bars 2 The input mode of terminals EN1 and EN2 is fixed at SOURCE It cannot be switched to SINK 3 When not using the Enable input function short the circuit between EN 1 PS and EN2 PS with jumper bars that is keep the short bars connected Terminal EN circuit specification lt Control circuit gt Operating voltage 27 V Photocoupler SOURCE 2V i Operating current at ON aenn Allowable leakage current at e PS EN terminal Power terminal for terminals EN1 and EN2 power This terminal outputs 24 VDC Reference for terminal CM PLC signal 1 Connects to PLC output sig
78. to 10 000 Hz P12 30Ch M1 Iron Loss Factor 1 0 00 to 10 00 P13 30Dh M1 Iron Loss Factor 2 0 00 to 10 00 P14 30Eh M1 Iron Loss Factor 3 0 00 to 10 00 P15 30Fh B3h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 1 1 10 0 to 100 0 Y i YIN 2 Y Y NIN Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 93 75 P16 310h B4h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 2 1 10 0 to 100 0 Y i YIN 2 Y Y NIN Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 87 5 P17 311h B5h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 3 1 10 0 to 100 0 Y ij YIN 2 Y Y N IN Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 75 P18 312h B6h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 4 1 10 0 to 100 0 Y YIN 2 Y Y N N Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 62 5 P19 313h B7h M1 Magnetic Saturation Factor 5 1 0 0 to 100 0 Y hi YIN 2 Y Y NIN Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 50 P20 314h M1 Secondary Time Constant 0 001 to 9 999 s P21 315h M1 Induced Voltage Factor 0 to 999 V Y vin o Y yY n v P22 316h M1 R2 Correction Factor 1 0 500 to 5 000 P23 317h M1 R2 Correction Factor 2 0 500 to 5 000 P24 318h M1 R2 Correction Factor 3 0 010 to 5 000 lt P25 319h M1 Exciting Current Correction 0 000 to 5 000 AAN N Factor P26 Depending upon the inverter s capacity sian BEn Mt ACR ea eee Remarks Function code P28 P29 P30 P32 P
79. to FRN630VG10 40l Temperature detection 1 As shown in Figure 2 2 13 route the control circuit wires along the left side panel to the outside of the inverter 2 Secure those wires to the wiring support using a cable tie e g Insulok with 3 8 mm or less in width and 1 5 mm or less in thickness A Control circuit terminal block Wiring for control circuit terminals Details of Section A Wiring for control circuit terminals Figure 2 2 13 Wiring Route and Fixing Position for the Control Circuit Wires Cote Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires with a cable tie inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 35 2 2 7 Switching connectors E Location of the switching connectors The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board power PCB as shown below Power switching Keypad enclosure Connectors CN UX Fan power PA supply switching y _ EA E 7 SAREE f re 1 connectors
80. to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately 137 Chapter 8 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 8 1 Compliance with European Standards C The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC which are issued by the Council of the European Communities Table 8 1 1 Conformity with Standards Standards IEC EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Second environment Industrial EMC Directives Emission 220 kW or below Category C2 280 kW or above Category C3 IEC EN61326 3 1 2008 Low Voltage Directive IEC EN61800 5 1 2007 tents EN ISO13849 1 2008 PL d Category 3 Maenner PUCcuNe IEC EN 60204 1 2009 Stop category 0 IEC EN 61800 5 2 2007 SIL2 Functional Safety Standard IEC EN 62061 2010 SIL2 8 1 1 Compliance with EMC standards The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer For this reason Fuji s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the
81. to the 2010 version DCR2 4 O00C ORE 46 OQ Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor of 37 kW pprox j or above Note Select a DCR matching not the inverter capacity but the nominal applied motor Applicable reactors differ E depending upon the selected HD MD or LD mode even on the same type of inverters Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD mode inverters of 55 kW are provided together with a DCR as standard Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter 4 PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor Using a PWM converter High power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series corrects the inverter power factor up to nearly 1 When combining an inverter with a PWM converter disable the main power down detection by setting the function code H76 to 0 default If the main power down detection is enabled H76 1 the inverter interprets the main power as being shut down ignoring an entry of a run command 5 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB Install a recommended MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Since using an MCCB or RCD ELCB with a lager capacity than recommended ones breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system be sure to select recommended ones Also select ones with short circuit breaking capacity suita
82. when no power is applied to the inverter It is provided as an option for inverters of up to 22 kW and as standard for those of 30 kW or above Battery voltage capacity 3 6 V 1100 mAh oo eb Replacement interval as a guide 5 years Battery surrounding temperature 60 C Inverter not powered Unit mm Max 32 Max 418 Figure 7 4 1 Outside View and Dimensions AWARNING Safety Precautions The lithium thionyl chloride battery which contains lithium dangerous material and thionyl chloride deleterious material is a hermetically sealed high energy density battery Improper use of the battery could cause deformation leakage of battery fluid Liquid inside the battery leaks out heat generation battery rupture or fire or produce irritant and corrosive gas This could result in bodily injury or inverter fault Be sure to observe the following precautions Take care not to swallow the battery Do not apply excessive force to the positive terminal of the battery Do not drop the battery Do not short circuit the battery terminals Do not charge the battery Do not discharge the battery forcedly Never heat the battery Never put the battery into fire Never disassemble the battery Do not deform the battery by pressure When loading the battery into the inverter take care not to insert it in wrong direction Do not touch the fluid leaked from the battery Do not leave a damaged battery in the inverte
83. wo SS nma 1500 A gt HE Ais D gt 2 Q O qu a e AMM 7h 54h Acceleration Time 1 0 01 to 99 99 s Y 5 00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 8h 55h Deceleration Time 1 0 01 to 99 99 s Y 5 00 Y Y 13 YIYIY Y 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 56h M1 Electronic Thermal Overload O to 2 Y Y N 85 Y Y Y Y Protection Disable For a VG dedicated motor Select motor characteristics Enable For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan Enable For an inverter driven motor with separately powered cooling fan Detection level 0 01 to 99 99 A Y N 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 A 1000 to 2000 A Eh Oto5 Y Y Y Y Y Y No restart Trip immediately with alarm No restart Trip after recovery from power failure with alarm No restart Trip after decelerate to stop with alarm 1 Restart Continue to run Restart at the speed at which the power failure occurred Restart at the starting speed 0 0 to 200 0 Y 100 0 1YIY 2 Y Y Y Y Ratio to analog speed setting on terminal 12 Limited to 110 of the maximum speed 30000 to 30000 r min Y YIY 5 Y Y Y Y Bias to analog speed setting on terminal 12 Limited to 110 of the maximum speed EROS 0 0 to 30 0 s Y Y YIYIYIN 0 0 Disable 0 1 to 30 0s h Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection Gain for terminal 12 input Bias for terminal 12 input 14h 59h DC Braki
84. 0 22 _ FRN22vGIO20 0 J x 3 7 enwan gt oo o FRNSSVGIO 20 3 5 gt 7s mnsvan20 o oo o o s ss EN m m 5 5 ap FRNivaig20 _ 55s 14 8 0 3 g 45 FRNISVGID2D 14 S 18 5 FRNISSVGID20 m b 2 FRN22VG10 20 Se 5 30_ FRN3ovGID 20 38 37 FRN37VG1O 20 FRNZ0VGIO 20 60 EEE FRN45VGIO 20 FRN37VG1I020 60 106 55 FRN55SVG10 20 FRN45VG1IO 20 100 75 FRN75VG10 20 a N5S5VGIO 20 El z El _ 7 150 90 FRN9VGIO 20 FRN75VGIO 20 150 1 200 uo CO FRNGOVGIO 2O 200 250 FRN37VGIO 4O 2 0 FRNS 5VGIO 40 2 0 75 FRN7SVGIO4O gt gt FRNIVGIO40 3 5 3 5 15 FRNISVGIO 40 O a H a a i83 FRNiRSVGICO A a E ee RN 22 FRN2VGIOO 8083 8083 30 FRNS0VGIO4O 14 37 FRN37VGIO 40 FRNSOVGIO 40 a a 45 FRN45VGIO 40 FRN37 G10 40 FRNSSVGIO 40 FRN45VG10 40 ae ae ae 38 3175 FRN75VGIO 40 FRN5SVG1O 40 2 60 90 FRN9VGIO 40 FRN75VGIO 40 6 406 2 FRN110VG10 40 FRN90VG10 40 FRN90VG10 40 o E 132 FRN132VG10 40 FRN110VG10 40 a N110VG10 40 22 i 3 FRN160VG10 40 a 40 FRN132VG10 40 E FRN200VG10 40 FRN160VG10 40 FRN160VG10 40 m FRN220VG10 40 FRN200VG10 40 aR N200VG10 40 250 FRN220VG10 40 325 0 H gt FRN2OGIAO 250 FRN280VGIO 4O gt gt 200x2 FRN315VG10 40 FRN280VGIO 40 150x2 FRN355VG10 40 FRN280VG10
85. 1 and EN2 is guaranteed check at least once a year that the Safe Torque Off STO function works correctly 126 7 4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals When the replacement is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 4 1 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals See Note below DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fans 10 years Fuses 10 years Battery 5 years Battery surrounding temperature 60 C Inverter not powered Note These replacement intervals are based on the inverter s service life estimated at a surrounding temperature of 40 C at 100 HD mode inverters or 80 MD LD mode inverters of full load In environments with a surrounding temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may be shorter Notes for periodic replacement of parts 1 The replacement intervals listed above are a guide for almost preventing parts from failure if those parts are replaced with new ones at the intervals They do not guarantee the completely fault free operation 2 The table above does not apply to unused spare parts being kept in storage It applies only when they are stored in a well ventilated
86. 13 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 14 Wrong connection or poor contact of DC reactor DCR 15 No reference speed setting keypad operation 16 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode Under vector control with speed sensor 17 Incorrect setting of the number of poles of the motor What to Check and Suggested Measures Referring to the run command block diagram given in the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 check the higher priority run command using Menu 2 DATA CHECK and Menu 4 I O CHECK with the keypad gt Correct the wrong setting of function codes e g cancel the higher priority run command gt Correct wrong setting of function code H30 Communications link function Mode selection or cancel the higher priority run command Check the data of function codes F76 Speed limiter mode F77 and F78 Speed limiter levels 1 and 2 gt Correct the data of F76 through F78 Check the data of function codes E01 through E09 and the input signal status of X terminals using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting Check the input signal status of terminal EN using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Short circuit the terminal EN with terminal PS Check the input status of the EN terminal using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Short circuit each of EN1 and EN
87. 2 30 37 45 55 75 110 MCCB Disconnect or RCD ELCB etc Power supply FRENIC VG 142 Nominal applied motor Inverter type kW FRN3 7VG10 40 FRN5 5VG10 40 FRN7 5VG10 40 18 5VGO 40 22VG10 40 PRNIOVGICND N37VG10 40l N75VG10 40l N110VG10 40l 132V G1 0 40 HD MD LD mode DET nD roca nD roce mo asaca mo saeco AD oran 160 1EC60269 4 HD 250 1EC60269 4 LD HD 315 1EC60269 4 LD HD 315 1EC60269 4 LD HD 350 1EC60269 4 LD 350 1EC60269 4 HD 350 1EC60269 4 LD HD 350 1EC60269 4 D LD HD 400 1EC60269 4 D LD HD 450 1EC60269 4 D LD HD 500 1EC60269 4 D LD HD 550 1EC60269 4 LD D D H Fuse rating A 630 1EC60269 4 i J 900 IEC60269 4 a E T HD lt E LD 1250 D 1EC60269 4 Con formity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued AWARNING A When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD ELCB on the input primary of the inverter if the power supply is three phase 200 400 V The inverter s
88. 2 with PS Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 9 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals Check the wiring and the motor Measure the output current Repair the wires to the motor or replace them Repair the motor or replace it Measure the output current gt Reduce the load In winter the load tends to increase Increase the inverter and motor capacities Check whether any mechanical brake is activated Release the mechanical brake if any Check that the motor switching signal selecting motor 1 2 or 3 is correct using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad and that the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify the function code data to match the connected motor Check whether the reference speed is below the slip compensated speed of the motor Function codes P10 and P11 for M1 A12 and A13 for M2 and A112 and A113 for M3 gt Change the reference speed so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated speed of the motor Check whether increasing the toque boost Function code P35 A55 A155 starts rotating the motor gt Increase the data of P35 A55 or A155 Check the data of function code F04 A05 or A105 gt Change the V f pattern setting to match each motor Check the wiring between the main circuit terminals P1 and P Inverters of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters of 75 kW or above come with a DCR as standard Without connection
89. 2 2 6 Example of Electric Noise Reduction Run forward 1 When terminals FWD and CM are closed the motor runs in the forward command direction When they are opened the motor decelerates to a stop SINK When terminals FWD and PLC are closed the motor runs in the forward direction When they are opened the motor decelerates to a stop SOURCE 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the slide switch SW1 Refer to Section 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches Run reverse 1 When terminals REV and CM are closed the motor runs in the forward direction command When they are opened the motor decelerates to a stop SINK When terminals REV and PLC are closed the motor runs in the forward direction When they are opened the motor decelerates to a stop SOURCE 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the slide switch SW1 Refer to Section 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches Digital input 1 1 Various signals such as Coast to a stop Enable external alarm trip and Select multistep speed can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E01 to E09 For details refer to Chapter 5 Function Codes Digital input 3 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the slide switch SW1 Refer to Section 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X9 If the logic Digital input 5 value for ON of
90. 33 P34 P35 P36 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 U IS N U R 00 P49 P50 P51 c 2 oat N amp i Format type Change when running ff Default setting Communica tions address Name Data setting range 485 Link No COh M1 Pulse Resolution 100 to 60000 1024 h M1 External PG Correction Factor 0000 to 4FFF Cih M1 Thermistor Selection 0 to 3 0 No thermistor 1 NTC thermistor 2 PTC thermistor 3 Ai M TMP The protection level of the motor protective functions should be specified by E30 to E32 Y EE o Sie Q gt Zz YU gt Zz Yin o y Oor1 Y Y N 0 Disable 1 Enable Enabling this auto tuning activates the compensation function for the resistance change caused by the temperature rise of the motor running N eee 220 Y N NIN Y Y 440 Y w m gt D gt 2 Q 8 s Q E 320h h N M1 Online Auto tuning o 321 h M1 Maximum Output Voltage Maximum none Limit 322 323h 0 0 Auto torque boost for constant torque load 0 1 to 0 9 For variable torque load 1 0 to 1 9 For proportional torque load 2 0 to 20 0 For constant torque load Z lt Z Z a 324h N wo N gt gt w N U gt w N Q 5 M1 Overcurrent Protection Level Ee ES Bi M1 Pulse Resolution 0 h M1 Torque Boost 2000 900 Be 0 to 20 0 Y YIN N N Y Exclusive to V f control h M1 Output Current Fluctuation 0 00 t
91. 6 A OC O 136 1 Free ofcharge warranty period and warranty range sii irradia 136 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc oooccccccccnnnnnonononoonnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 137 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding perlod ccconnnnncoconooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 137 4A a ON 137 PAD SA A seston ao Se De ge E tonsa 137 FO sAmplicaBle scope Of Ser dd 137 Chapter 8 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS p 138 8 1 Compliance with European Standards WB sccsscsscsscasacedsctnacass lcd niise oa nesai becegnzasss 138 8 1 1 Compliance with EMC standards miii diia 138 8 1 2 Harmonic component regulation in the PU iia 141 8 1 3 Compliance with the low voltage directive in the EU oooooccccnnnocicococcnocononocncnnnononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn ncnnannannnnnos 141 8 2 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification ususe oooooonincnncnnnnononnnncncncncnnno 147 8 3 Compliance with the Radio Waves Act South Korea oooononcicnnicnnncnnnnnonononcnnnnnnnn cacon cnnnnonnnn corn ono ra cnnnnonannons 151 8 4 Compliance with Functional Safety Sanda ii 152 A e A A 152 8 4 2 Notes for compliance to Functional Safety Standard ccccccnnnnnoooononoooonnnnnnnononononnnnnannn non onnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanann conos 153 8 4 3 Functional safety performance usarse elas iinsala lloraba 154 8 4 4 Inverter output state when Safe Torque
92. After changing the position of the top mounting base some screws may be left unused 3 Remove the base fixing screws from the bottom of the inverter move the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it with the base fixing screws just as in step 2 Inverters with a capacity of 220 kW or below have no case fixing screws on the bottom Base fixing screws Case fixing screws Bottom mounting lt base Base fixing screws Figure 2 1 3 Changing the Positions of the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases A CAUTION When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 13 2 2 Wiring 2 2 1 Connection diagram Thermal relay Transformer 13 245 FU oros DBR option 6 A oe Grounding 8 terminal e a Grounding 1 MCCB or 2 terminal RCD ELCB MC 200 V class series x 200 to 230V x 50 60 Hz X 400 V class series x 1 380 to 480 V i 50 60 Hz Power supply Inverter unit Auxiliary control power input Ro Power switching connector FRENIC VG y O NGS Fan power supply switching connector Auxiliary fan power input 9 R1 CN R CN W 4 E j 14 Speed setting input AE 0112 t THC Q 1 u Ln 4 swe 5v 1a1 12 TH1 thermistor Analog input 1 7 Input signal off OFF Vy i I I t l 1 i 1 PGPIO 12 1
93. Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the cause of alarm when the protective function is activated Monitors LCD monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes E In Running mode Running status information E In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data E In Alarm mode Alarm information which identifies the cause of an alarm when the protective function is activated In Running mode these indexes show the unit of the number displayed on the Indicator indexes 7 segment LED monitor and the running status information on the LCD monitor For details see the next page Switches the operation modes of the inverter Shifts the cursor to the right for entry of a numerical value Pressing this key after removing the cause of an alarm switches the inverter to Running mode This key 1s used to reset settings or screen transition A O UP and DOWN keys which are used to select the setting items or change function code data Function Data key which switches the operation mode as follows E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter detected speed p speed command torque command etc rogramming keys E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code and establishes the newly entered data E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on
94. B E A a Ll EE E o Winding up speed Counter weight S E T 5 lt i lt lt lt ec lt lt z z o IES QS 310 gt 5 gt Machine efficiency Safety coefficient Rated load 1 S EN N 5 h Alarm Data Deletion S EN K F 446h Oor 1 h Selection Depending upon the inverter s capacity 96 Remarks Function code iN aN iN A D D D D D D a a a a a A A A A A Ss a N fo TI m w Q W a a y H75 H76 H77 H78 H79 H80 H81 H82 H83 H85 H86 H87 H88 H89 H90 H94 H99 H101 H102 Communica tions address S al O gt 457h 459h 45A S al m s S5 463h 1F01h 1F02h i i h h h h h h h h h h h h h h hl Overspeed Alarm Level h Name 485 Link No Power Sequence Configuration of Main Circuit Output Wires Main Power Shutdown Detection Continuance Timer for Cooling Fan ON OFF Control Initialization of Startup Counter Total Run Time Initialization of Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Initialization of Service Life of DC Link Bus Capacitor Startup Count for Maintenance Maintenance Interval Calendar Clock Year month Day hour Minute second Setting up clock Speed Detection Monitor Selection under vector control for IM without speed sensor unde
95. Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the surrounding temperature 1 Check visually or 1 The installation humidity vibration and atmosphere measure using environment given in dust gas oil mist or water drops apparatus Chapter 1 Section 1 3 1 2 Check that tools or other foreign must be satisfied materials or dangerous objects are not 2 Visual inspection 2 No foreign or left around the equipment dangerous objects are left External 1 Check that the bolts securing the wires 1 Retighten 1 No looseness If loose appearance and to the main circuit terminals and retighten the screws others control circuit terminals are not loose 2 3 before turning the power ON o 2 Visual inspection No abnormalities 2 Check for traces of overheat P discoloration and other defects 3 Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration 3 Auditory visual and olfactory inspection Cooling fans Check for abnormal noise or excessive Auditory and visual No abnormalities vibration when the cooling fans are in inspections operation Keypad Check for alarm indication Visual inspection If any alarm is displayed refer to Chapter 6 Performance Check that the inverter provides the Check the monitor items No abnormalities in the expected performance as defined in the shown on the keypad output speed current and standard specifications voltage and other running data 124 7 3 Peri
96. D LD HD D HD LD mo mo Pp Pup a mo 37 FR 55 75 a aa ES Em a ox Be E FRN55VG10 40 ENE Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C 145 Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued AWARNING A Recommended wire size mm Main circuit Main power MCCB Or input RCD ELCB 1 L1 R L2 S Inverter type Rated current L3 T Inverter s grounding SG meo 185x2 185x2 185x2 Hana PES EIA 240x2 FRN280VG1 pan H2 240x2 FRN315VG10 40 ES FRN280VG10 40l 300x2 355 FRN315VG10 40 300x2 240x3 300x3 1200 FRN355 G10 40 HD FRN315VG10 40 300x3 240x4 EN FRN500VG10 40 300x4 1400 300x4 FRN630VG10 40 1600 400 FRN355VG10 40 Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination HD LD mode Power supply voltage Control circuit Nominal applied motor Aux fan power Inverter outputs DC reactor Braking resistor Aux control power Y FRN400VG1 0 40 FRN355VG10 40l gt o 5 Y o n g f a o o E ico FRN400VG1O 40
97. D Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB N Mola When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter do not connect the power supply line directly to terminals RO SS and TO If a PWM is to be connected insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic sate at the power supply side For connection examples at the PWM converter side refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 8 Section 8 5 2 Power regenerative PWM converters RHC series Molded case circuit breaker or Residual current operated protectice device Magnetic Filter Boost Earth leakage circuit breaker reactor reactor PWM FRENIC VG converter R P S contactor P NC Insulation transformer 100 VA Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 2 4 Connection Example of PWM Converter 27 Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped with terminals R1 and T1 Only if the inverter works with the DC linked power input whose source is a PWM converter these terminals are used to feed AC power to the fans while they are not used in any power system of ordinary configuration In this case set up the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W Terminal rating 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 380 to 440 VAC S50
98. Dc braking FRENIC VG Braking unit resistor DBR 2 Connecting other external devices A DC link bus of other inverter s or a PWM converter is connectable to these terminals For connection examples at the PWM converter side refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 8 Section 8 5 2 Power regenerative PWM converters RHC series 26 Primary grounding terminal G for inverter enclosure Two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed for use with safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters The grounding terminal for inverter enclosure should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO In general the inverter runs normally without power supplied to the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO If the inverter main power is shut down however no power is supplied to the control circuit so that the inverter cannot issue a variety of output signals or display on the keypad To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function
99. ENIC VG Check whether the setting of function code P02 matches the connected motor gt Correct the data of P02 For other motors gt Perform auto tuning Check the data of F07 C35 C46 C56 or C66 acceleration time Increase the acceleration time Measure the inverter output current Decrease the moment of inertia of the load gt Increase the inverter capacity Check the terminal voltage of the motor gt Use larger size wires between the inverter and motor or make the wiring distance shorter Measure the output current gt Decrease the torque of the load gt Increase the inverter capacity 120 Possible Causes Under V f control 6 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that increasing the torque boost P35 A55 A155 starts the motor gt Increase the value of the torque boost P35 A55 A155 12 When the T Link communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command takes effect Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 Incorrect setting of the communications link operation H30 Incorrect setting of the transmission format 032 Incorrect setting of the link number Data not written to the I O relay area as assigned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the setting of the communications link operation is correct H30 gt Correct the data of H30 gt Check the st
100. FO Fuji Electric Innovating Energy Technology Instruction Manual High performance Vector Control Inverter FRENIC VG ACAUTION Thank you for purchasing our high performance vector control FRENIC VG series of inverters e This product is designed to drive a three phase motor Read through this instruction manual to become familiar with proper handling and correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For instructions on how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device This manual provides major functions of the FRENIC VG For details refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Fuji Electric Co Ltd INR SI47 1580b E Copyright O 2013 Fuji Electric Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our high performance vector control FRENIC VG series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three
101. For details refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise Check the motor sound carrier frequency specified by F26 gt Increase the setting of F26 Note that increasing the carrier frequency excessively may cause other devices to malfunction due to noise generated from the inverter Check whether it happens during auto tuning gt Increase the exciting current P08 A10 A110 and then perform auto tuning Check the function code setting P28 A30 A130 gt Match the function code settings with the PG specifications Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter for the phase sequence wire breaks shielding and twisting gt Correct the wiring Check whether the inverter internal control circuit PG input circuit is faulty using the self diagnosis function of the PG detection circuit H74 gt Ifthe result is Normal replace the PG if it is Abnormal contact your Fuji Electric representative Check the PG waveform using an oscilloscope gt Replace the PG Problem Temperature around heat sink has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 The surrounding temperature exceeded the range of the inverter specification Sub code 0001 to 0008 2 Ventilation path is blocked Sub code 0001 to 0008 3 Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the
102. Front cover 6 a FRN7 5VG10 20 Internal air circulation fan Keypad enclosure openable Control circuit Front terminal block cover Warning C plate Warning label Main nameplate S oe ant ce p Sub nameplate Main circuit terminal block Q b FRN220VG1 0 40 Figure 1 2 1 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters 2 Warning plates and label FRENIC VG A WARNING A E RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK e Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation e Do not remove this cover while applying power RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK e Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation e Do not remove any cover while applying power and at least 5min after disconnecting power e More than one live circuit See instruction manual e Securely ground earth the equipment High touch current mA FY AES RCSF AA CLRATZCMAAYMRRERRRH RRR iT ERAN SS PALATE WOR HERR njh BRENDSTNS FAN TERIOR DIRAN a CTO NES CCe EDU ARONA REN ARCE EREDI CC Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details a FRN7 5vG 10 20 e This cover can be removed after at least 10 min of power off and after the CHARGE lamp turns off e More than one live circuit See instruction manual e Do not insert fingers or anything else into the inverter e Securely ground earth the equipment e High touch curren
103. I O CHECK with the keypad gt Correct wrong setting of function code H30 Communications link function Mode selection or cancel the higher priority run command Check whether the analog speed command is correctly inputted using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 A11 and A12 correctly gt Inspect the external speed command potentiometers signal converters switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty Check that a speed command has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O CHECK on the keypad gt Set the reference speed at the same or higher than the starting speed F23 Reconsider the starting speed F23 and if necessary change it to the lower value switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 Ail and A12 correctly gt gt Inspect the external speed command potentiometers signal converters gt 114 Possible Causes 6 A run command with higher priority than the one attempted was active 7 The speed limiter settings were made incorrectly 8 The coast to stop command was effective 9 No input on EN1 or EN2 10 Broken wires incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor Or the motor defective 11 Overload 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Under V f control
104. M3 Thermistor Type M1 Rated Speed M2 Rated Speed 1500 r min M3 Rated Speed Rated voltage of nominal applied motors M1 Rated Voltage M2 Rated Voltage M3 Rated Voltage M1 Rated Capacity AA Motor ratings M2 Rated Capacity printed on the nameplate of the motor M3 Rated Capacity Rated current of nominal applied motors M1 Rated Current M2 Rated Current M3 Rated Current M1 Poles M2 Poles M3 Poles M1 Maximum Speed M2 Maximum Speed Machinery design values 1500 r min M3 Maximum Speed Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your Acceleration Time 1 machinery design values If the specified time is Note short the inverter may not run the motor i i roperly F08 Deceleration Time 1 properly 500s Note LL For the motor parameter auto tuning procedure H01 3 or 4 refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 5 H Codes High performance Functions Function f 4 3 Auto tuning with motor stopped J Disabl Tumne Peleton 4 Auto tuning with motor rotating OS Note Performing motor parameter auto tuning H01 3 or 4 automatically changes the data of function codes P06 through P11 and P15 through P21 for M1 A08 through A13 and A17 through A23 for M2 and A108 through A113 and A117 through A123 for M3 Be careful with this data change After tuning be sure to perform the full save function H02 1 to save the tuned data into the inverter
105. N5 5VG10 20 FRN5 5VG10 40 FRN7 5G10 20 FRN7 5VG10 40 FRN11vG10 20 FRN11vG10 40 ISVGIO 20 FRN15VG10 40l Figure B FRN N FRN18 5V G10 20 FRN18 5VG1040 FRN22VG10 20 FRN22VG10 40 FRN30VG1040 FRN37 G1 040 rca RO E ce FRN45VG1040 SS FRNS55VG1040 FRN37VG10 20 FRN45VG10 20 FRN75VG1IO 40 Figure D FRN55VG10 20 M10 27 12 o o Rovana FRN7SVGID2D FigreF a TFeNI6GIDAO 9 FRN200VG 10 40 FRN90VG10O0 20 E Figure H F 220VG10 40 M 48 FRN315VG10 40 FRN110VG10 40 RN oo o o FRN FRN3SSVGIDAD FRNA0OVGIDAD FRNSOOVGIO 40 FRN630VG1 0 40 AWARNINGA When the inverter power is ON a high voltage is applied to the following terminals Main circuit terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P NC DB U V W RO TO R1 T1 AUX contact 30A 30B 30C YSA Y5C Insulation level Main circuit Enclosure Basic insulation Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 Main circuit Control circuit Reinforced insulation Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 Relay output Control circuit Reinforced insulation Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 An electric shock may occur 21 Table 2 2 2 Recommended Wire Sizes E o Nominal Recommended wire size mm 5 applied Inverter type Main circuit power input Inverter 5 5 motor L1 R L2 S L3 T mer output en 7 0 wiper wopor 199 vw PERO FRNO 75VGIO20 FRNISVGIO2
106. No abnormalities If any section is stained clean it with a soft cloth 1 2 3 No abnormalities If any section is stained clean it with a soft cloth 1 2 No abnormalities Terminal Check that the terminal blocks are not Visual inspection No abnormalities blocks damaged DC link bus capacitor Braking resistor Printed circuit board Cooling fan Ventilation path 1 Check for electrolyte leakage discoloration cracks and swelling of the casing 2 Check that the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary 1 Check for abnormal odor or cracks in insulators caused by overheat 2 Check for wire breakage 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 2 Check for odor and discoloration 3 Check for cracks breakage deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation 1 Check for any abnormality 2 Check for loose bolts 3 Check for discoloration caused by overheat Check the heat sink intake and exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials 1 2 Visual inspection 3 Judgment on service life using Menu 5 MAINTENANCE in Section 3 4 4 6 1 Olfactory and visual inspection 2 Check the wires visually or disconnect either one wire and measure the conductivity with a multimeter 1 Retighten 2 Olfactory and visual inspection 3 4 Visual inspection Judgment on ser
107. ON 1 Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level Use Cu wire only Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits Short circuit rating Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum for 200V class input 22 kW or less 230 Volts maximum for 200V class input 30 kW or above when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 200V class input Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 400V class input Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer All circuits with terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T RO TO R1 T1 m
108. SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes code PO1 M1 Drive Control M2 Drive Control M3 Drive Control AO1 A101 M1 Selection P30 M1 Thermistor Type A31 A131 F04 A05 A105 M2 Thermistor Type M3 Thermistor Type M1 Rated Speed M2 Rated Speed M3 Rated Speed M1 Rated Voltage M2 Rated Voltage M3 Rated Voltage M1 Maximum Output Voltage M2 Maximum Output Voltage M3 Maximum Output Voltage M1 Rated Capacity M2 Rated Capacity M3 Rated Capacity M1 Rated Current M2 Rated Current M3 Rated Current POS A07 A107 F03 A06 A106 M1 Poles M2 Poles M3 Poles M1 Maximum Speed M2 Maximum Speed M3 Maximum Speed Acceleration time 1 Note Deceleration time 1 Note M1 Torque Boost M2 Torque Boost M3 Torque Boost M1 RI M2 R1 M3 R1 A08 A108 M2 X M3 X A09 A109 5 V f control for IM 37 Others No modification is required for M2 or M3 0 No thermistor Motor ratings printed on the nameplate of the motor Machinery design values Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor properly 2 0 For constant torque load To use the auto torque boost function P35 A55 A155 0 0 be sure to perform motor parameter auto tuning H01 2 66 0
109. SM 1 Before proceeding with a test run This section provides a test run procedure for the configuration consisting of the FRENIC VG the interface card for PMPG drive OPC VG1 PMPG and a PMSM using a UVW phase detection PG including GNF2 motor For a test run using a PMSM it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the equipment for testing it by itself If it is impossible to drive the motor by itself due to the equipment however make a test run under the conditions that cause no problems even if the motor runs continuously in one direction forward or reverse 2 Preparation for a test run 1 Before turning the inverter power ON make checking given in Section 4 1 Checking Prior to Powering On 2 Check that wiring of the encoder PG is correct For the connection diagram refer to the User s Manual Chapter 2 Section 2 7 1 2 In combination with a dedicated PMSM GNE2 type ACAUTION Wrong wiring may break the PG If the inverter is powered on with wrong wiring disconnect the PG signal wires from the inverter keep only the PG powered on via the PGP and PGM and then check that each signal is correctly output with an oscilloscope or recorder 3 Turn the power ON make a note of the current configuration of all function codes and then change the function code data as listed in Table 4 4 1 4 Check that the magnetic pole position offset 010 is set to the previously specified value or manua
110. Safety Standard compliant safety system AWARNING A The output shutdown function of this inverter uses the Safe Torque Off STO function prescribed in IEC EN61800 5 2 so that 1t does not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically Depending upon applications therefore additional measures are necessary for safety of end users e g brake function that locks the machinery and motor terminal protection that prevents possible electrical hazard s The output shutdown function does not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically Before starting wiring or maintenance jobs therefore be sure to disconnect the input power to the inverter and wait at least five minutes for inverters of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for those of 30 kW or above Otherwise an electric shock could occur Enable terminals and peripheral circuit and internal circuit configuration Safety circuit breakers complying with Conventional inverter EN 1S013849 1 PL d Cat 3 or higher Power supply Safety switch complying with EN 15013849 1 PL d Cat 3 or higher Emergency an stop button Figure 8 4 1 Conventional Inverters i FRENIC VG FRNOOOVG10 O0 Safety relay unit complying with EN 15013849 1 PL d Cat 3 or higher Emergency stop button Transistor output terminals e g Y1 CMY DECF Function code data 80 Refer to Section 5 3 Figure 8 4 2 FRNOOOVG10 00 152 8 4 2 Notes f
111. Setting up the slide switches A USB port connector mini B that connects an inverter to a computer FRENIC VG Loader inverter support software running on the computer supports editing the function codes transferring them to the inverter verifying them test running an inverter and monitoring the inverter running status FRENIC VG Loader free version 1s available as an install from the CD ROM that comes with the inverter as an accessory or as a free download from our website at http www fujielectric com products The free version supports editing transferring and verifying of function codes and the traceback function The PG interface uses a complementary output mode PA Input terminal for A phase of the pulse generator PB Input terminal for B phase of the pulse generator When 12V power supply is in use H level gt 9V L level lt 1 5V When 15V power supply is in use H level gt 12V L level lt 1 5V Input pulse frequency 100 kHz or below Duty 50 10 Wiring length 100 m or less Note False detection may occur due to noise Make the wiring length as short as possible and take sufficient noise control measures Power supply terminal for a pulse generator Output 12 VDC 10 or 15 VDC 10 Maximum current 270 mA For output voltage switching refer to Section 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches Common terminal for pulse generator power signal Electrically isolated from terminals 11 M
112. T SHIF lt FORMAT gt mmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AV gt FORMAT SHIF T Press key to establish the newly specified date format lt FORMAT gt JAN 01 2012 hh mm ss AV gt SHIFT F aM 51 NO lt FORMAT gt JAN 01 2012 AM hh mm ss AV gt SHIFT F PE lz 215 lt FORMAT gt JAN 01 2012 PM 02 43 37 STORING AV gt FORMAT SHIF T lt DATE TIME gt ADJUST SFORMAT AV gt SHIFT 3 Selecting the No display 9 COMM INFO 10 DATA COPY 11 CHANGES 12 DATEYTIME AV gt MENU SHIFT lt DATEYTIME gt PADJUST FORMAT AV gt SHIFT F lt DATE TIME gt ADJUST gt FORMAT AV gt 3SHIFT F lt FORMAT gt yYyyyy4mm dd hh mm ss AV gt FORMAT SHIF lt FORMAT gt dd mm yyyy hh mm ss AV gt FORMAT SHIF lt FORMAT gt lt OFF gt hh mm ss AV gt FORMAT SHIF Change the time format data using the Y and Y keys lt List of time formats gt hh mm ss 0 24 hour minutes seconds hh mm ss AM 0 12 hour minutes seconds AM PM AM hh mm ss AM PM 0 12 hour minutes seconds gt lt OFF gt No display Press key to establish the newly specified time format After a second the screen automatically switches back to the submenu To display this menu screen press the key in Running mode to switch to Programming mode Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to 12 DATA TIME using the Y and Y keys Then press the key Press key to establis
113. T U V W GEO US 2 Mo Bro SG SG O O 40 40 O s a a SG GG 37 37 Figure H Charging lamp 6 6 51 51 23 Figure Charging lamp 51 51 51 y Hol a O L1 R El L1 R 51 51 51 51 51 51 P1 P NE 2 00 O 0 O 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 eG O 51 Figure J A Charging lamp 1 6 6 ELIO O 51 51 51 51 51 a51 aol O O L1 R P1 O O L1 R P1 LL gt a a TS NS 51 51 P ME SG OO SID O _ ar ear hs Bt 51 51 Figure K yen Charging lamp Viewed from A 24 3 Detailed functions of main circuit terminals Symbol Name Functions LI R L2 S Main circuit power Connect the three phase input power lines L3 T inputs U V W Inverter outputs Connect a three phase motor P PI DC reactor Connect a DC reactor DCR for correcting power factor connection Classifi HD and MD mode inverters A DCR is provided as an option for inverters of 55 kW or below and as standard for those of 75 kW or above LD mode inverters A DCR is provided as an option for inverters of 45 kW or below and as standard for those of 55 kW or above P N Braking unit Connect a braking resistor DBR via a braking unit connection For connection to the DC link bus Main circuit P DB External braking Connect an optional external braking resistor resistor connection Qa Grounding for Grounding terminals of the inverter inverter RO
114. TION MONITOR 3 26 OPTION MONITOR 4 27 OPTION MONITOR 5 28 OPTION MONITOR 6 3 0 LOAD FACTO 3 1 I T POWER 32 WATT HOUR If the screen system is password protected no menu can be selected until you enter the password 49 3 2 1 Setting the calendar clock Menu 12 DATE TIME Menu 12 DATE TIME in Programming mode is used to select the format of the calendar clock to be displayed in the operation guide line in Running mode and set the date and time AMCAUTI N After mounting a memory backup battery option for inverters of 22 kW or below attached as standard for those of 33 kW or above set the date and time When a memory backup battery is not mounted the calendar clock does not work correctly 1 Setting the date and time 9 COMM INFO 10 DATA COPY 11 CHANGES 12 DATEYTIME AV gt MENU SHIFT lt DATEYTIME gt gt ADJUST FORMAT AV gt SHIFT F ADJUST 2010 01 01 00 00 00 AV gt DATA ADJUST ADJUST 2011 01 01 02 43 15 AV gt DATA ADJUST A ADJUST 2011 01 01 PM 02 43 15 STORING lt DATE T IME gt SADJUST FORMAT AV gt SHIFT F To display this menu screen press the key in Running mode to switch to Programming mode Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to 12 DATA TIME using the Y and Y keys Then press the key Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to ADJUST using the Y and Y keys Then press the key Use the key to mov
115. VG Output transistor Power L1 R supply Safety relay unit complying with EN IS013849 1 PL d Cat 3 or higher Emergency stop button 1 Digital input terminal e g X1 2 If SW1 is in the SINK mode CM applies if in the SOURCE mode PLC applies 3 Transistor output terminals e g Y1 CMY DECF Function code data 80 Figure 8 4 6 Connection Diagram and Internal Circuit Configuration FWD OFF ON OFF ON OFF HLD OFF ON Emergency stop OFF ON OFF button Input to EN1 EN2 ON OFF ON Wait for a run Safe Torque Off Wait for a run verter ouput command STO di Figure 8 4 7 Prevention of Restarting 157 MEMO High Performance Vector Control Inverter FRENIC VG Instruction Manual First Edition May 2012 Second Edition February 2013 Fuji Electric Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC VG series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Fuji Electric Co Ltd Gate City Ohsaki East Tower 11 2 Osaki 1 chome Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0032 Japan Phone 81 3 5435 7058 Fax 81 3 5435 7420 URL http www fujiel
116. Vector control for IM Motor to be applied 1 NTC thermistor 1500 r min Rated voltage of nominal applied motors 200 V class series 220 V 400 V class series 440 V Capacity of nominal applied motors Rated current of nominal applied motors 0 01 A 1500 r min 0 0 Auto torque boost Depends on the rated capacity 0 00 Depends on the rated capacity 0 00 For the motor parameter auto tuning procedure H01 2 refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 5 H Codes High performance Functions Function HOI Tuning Selection 2 Auto tuning R1 Lo 0 Disable Note Performing motor parameter auto tuning H01 2 automatically changes the data of function codes P06 and P07 for M1 A08 and A09 for M2 and A108 and A109 for M3 Be careful with this data change After tuning be sure to perform the full save function H02 1 to save the tuned data into the inverter 4 4 Running the Inverter for Operation Check AWARNING e If the user configures the function codes without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC VG User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine e When making a test run with a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM be sure to observe the test run procedure given in Section 4 4 2 If wiring between the inverter and motor or PG wiring is wrong or the magnetic pole position offset is improper
117. a PG SD option is mounted the PG SD signal input info appears when it is not the inverter PG signal input info appears 56 4 2 2 Mounting direction of a PG pulse generator and PG signals The forward rotational direction of the dedicated motor MVK type is CCW when viewed from the motor output shaft as shown in Figure 4 2 2 During rotation in the forward direction the PG output pulse forms a forward rotation signal B phase advanced by 90 degrees shown in Figure 4 2 3 and during rotation in the reverse direction a reverse rotation signal A phase advanced by 90 degrees When mounting an external PG on motors other than the dedicated one directly connect it to the motor using a coupling etc gt g Figure 4 2 2 Forward Rotational Direction of Motor and PG Forward Reverse rotation signal a rotation signal A _ 1S A phase input B phase input Figure 4 2 3 PG Pulse Generator Signal 57 4 3 Selecting a Desired Motor Drive Control The FRENIC VG supports the following motor drive controls Data for P01 M1 drive control Speed feedback Speed control Vector control for IM with speed sensor Yes Section 4 3 1 Vector control for IM without speed sensor Estimated speed Section 4 3 2 Speed control FRENIC VG User s Simulation mode Yes with automatic speed Manual Chapter 4 regulator ASR Section 4 3 4 P codes Vector control for PMSM with speed Section 4 3 3 sensor
118. able impedance Min 3kQ e Gain adjustment range 0 to 100 times Analog Common for analog output signals Ao1 Ao2 and A03 common Electrically isolated from terminals CM CMY and PGM Analog output 3 32 Table 2 2 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Name Functions Transistor 1 Various signals such as Inverter running Speed valid and Speed agreement output 1 can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E15 to E18 For details refer to Chapter 5 Function Codes Transistor output 2 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 to Y4 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 to Y4 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output 3 Transistor Transistor output circuit specification output 4 lt Control circuit gt Item Max Operation ON level voltage OFF level Leakage current at OFF 0 1 mA Photocoupler Current Figure 2 2 10 Transistor Output Circuit C Note When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing i diode across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 100 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circui
119. ad conditions e g options attached or ON OFF of digital I O signals If actual load conditions are so different from the ones at which the initial reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level required then the inverter does not perform measuring The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are drastically restricted e g all input terminals being OFF in order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately Those conditions are therefore different from the actual operating conditions in almost all cases If the actual operating conditions are the same as those at shipment shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time however if they are different no automatic measurement is performed To perform it put those conditions back to the factory default ones and shut down the inverter Refer to the measuring procedure given below To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference capacitance initial setting when the inverter is introduced For the reference capacitance setup procedure see 2 on the next page Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring conditions of the DC link bus capacitor Setting bit 0 of H104 data at 0 restores the inverter to
120. al Gip To expose the control printed circuit board control PCB open the keypad enclosure Front cover fixing screws Front cover Front cover fixing screws Tightening torque 1 8 Nem M4 3 5 Nem M5 Figure 2 2 2 Removing the Front Cover FRN30VG101 2D 16 2 2 3 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other 6 After removing a screw from the main circuit terminal block be sure to restore the screw even if no wire is connected 7 Use the wiring guide to separate wiring For inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below the wiring guide separates the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires For inve
121. and the motor is long a voltage loss occurs due to reactance of the filter or wiring so that the insufficient voltage may cause output current oscillation or a lack of motor output torque 19 AWARNING When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Be sure to use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after shutting down the power Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of
122. apacity of 500 kW or 630 kW two L2 S input terminals are arranged vertically to the terminal block When connecting wires to these terminals use the bolts washers and nuts that come with the inverter as shown below we Qs a D RY OX Gp e 18 2 2 4 Wiring precautions 1 If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors 2 Precautions for high frequency leakage currents If the wiring distance between an inverter and a motor is long high frequency currents flowing through stray capacitance across wires of phases may cause an inverter overheat overcurrent trip increase of leakage current or 1t may not assure the accuracy in measuring leakage current Depending on the operating condition an excessive leakage current may damage the inverter To avoid the above problems when directly connecting an inverter to a motor keep the wiring distance 50 m or less for inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW or below and 100 m or less for inverters with a higher capacity If the wiring distance longer than the specified above is required lower the carrier frequency or insert an output circuit filter OFL 000 0A as shown below When a single inverter drives two or more motors connected in parallel group drive in particular using shielded wires the stray capacitance to the earth is large so lower the carrier frequency or insert an output cir
123. arm 1 Light alarm Thousands digit OH4 Motor overheat Hundreds digit OL1 OL3 Motor 1 to 3 overload Tenths digit nrb NTC thermistor wire break error OH2 External alarm 0000 Units digit 0000 to 1111 0 Heavy alarm 1 Light alarm Thousands digit Er5 RS 485 communications error Hundreds digit Er4 Network error Tenths digit Reserved Units digit ArF Toggle data error 0000 to 1111 0 Heavy alarm 1 Light alarm 4 Thousands digit Err Mock alarm Hundreds digit dFA DC fan locked Tenths digit Er9 Speed mismatch LOC Start delay ArE E SX bus tact synchronization error 0000 0000 Units digit 0000 to 1111 0000 0 Heavy alarm 1 Light alarm Ai Thousands digit Reserved Hundreds digit Reserved Tenths digit Reserved Units digit Reserved 0000 to 1111 0 Not light alarm 1 Light alarm 4 Thousands digit MOH Motor overheat early warning MOL Motor overload early warning Hundreds digit BaT Battery life expired Tenths digit LiF Life time early warning Units digit OH OL Heat sink overheat early warning overload early warning 0000 L AL not shown L AiL shown E Specified whether or not to display 4 on the LED monitor when a light alarm occurs Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 43 75 0 0 to 100 0 Compensation factor for exciting current when
124. atus of the X terminal to which the LE command Enable communications link 1s assigned Check whether the setting of the transmission format 1s correct 032 gt Correct the data of 032 4W 4W or 8W 8W Check the current setting of the link number that should be configured in hexadecimal gt Review the function code list Check the data held in the I O relay area using the MICREX loader Investigate writing into the I O relay area 13 When the SX bus communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command takes effect Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 Incorrect setting of the communications link operation H30 Terminal command LE is assigned to an X terminal but the terminal is OFF Incorrect setting of the transmission format U11 Incorrect setting of the link number Data not written to the I O relay area as assigned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the setting of the communications link operation is correct H30 gt Correct the data of H30 Check the status of the X terminal to which the LE command Enable communications link is assigned gt Turn the corresponding X terminal ON Check whether the transmission format selected by U11 is identical with the one selected in the system configuration definition gt Correct the setting of the transmission format Check the current setting of the link number that should
125. be configured in hexadecimal gt Review the function code list Check the data in application programs using the SX loader gt Investigate writing into the I O memory area 14 When the CC Link communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command takes effect Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 Incorrect setting of the communications link operation H30 Terminal command LE is assigned to an X terminal but the terminal is OFF Incorrect setting of the transmission format 032 Incorrect setting of the link number Data not written to the I O memory area as assigned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the setting of the communications link operation is correct H30 gt Correct the data of H30 Check the status of the X terminal to which the LE command Enable communications link is assigned Turn the corresponding X terminal ON Check whether the transmission format selected by 032 is identical with the one selected in the system configuration definition gt Correct the setting of the transmission format Check the current setting of the link number that should be configured in hexadecimal gt Review the function code list Check the data in application programs using the PLC loader gt Investigate writing into the I O memory area 121 15 __ _ _ under bar appears Problem Although you pressed the or key or entered a
126. ble by C21 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y 0 0 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 KES 0 0 00 Y Y Y 0 0 N Multistep Speed Configuration Definition Speed Command N2 C29 21Dh h Jogging Speed 0 to 30000 r min Y 50 Y Y Y Y Y Y Specifies the speed to be applied when the motor jogs cao 218n _nJASRIOG gan 8 lor 5000 imes SS o lea LVI C31 21Fh h I constant 1 0 000 to 10 000 s P control when C31 0 000 sa 90 Remarks Function code C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 C45 C46 C47 C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 Q O ro N E _ 5 Q O C70 C71 C72 C73 Communica tions address 485 No Oh 221h 222h 223h 224h 225h 226h 228h 229h N N gt NIN 22Fh NININJIN NINJIN e il E aki ee a 230h 231h N w N za 234h 235h 236h 237h 238h 239h N oO oO 2 23Bh 23Ch 23Dh 3Ah 23Eh 23Fh 240h 242h 243h 244h 245h 246h 247h 248h 249h Link No h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h A5h A6h h Name Input filter Detection filter Output filter Acceleration Time for Jogging Deceleration Time for Jogging S curve JOG Start side S curve JOG End side P gain l constant Feedforward gain Input filter Detection filter Output filter Ac
127. ble for the power source impedance Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB and Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB Nominal HD Rated current of MCCB and applied ven aS RCD ELCB A motor YP kW mee w DCR w o DCR FRNOTSVOIE2O Se a a FRNISVOTE2O FRN2 2VG10 20 FRN3 7VG1O 20 FRN5 5VG10 20 FRN7 5VGIO 20 FRN11VG10 20 15 RN15VvG10 20 FRN18 5 G1 0 20 RN22VG10 20 FRN30VG1 0 20 RN45VvG10 20 N55vG10 20 N75vG10 20 FRN90VG1 0 20 E Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB and Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB continued Power Nominal HD Rated current of MCCB and supply Enea Inverter type oe RCD ELCB A voltage es w DCR w o DCR N3 7VG10O 40 e e E E a a s feson fio w IE 41 HD NISVGIO 4O HD ERNIE 5vGio 4O HD a renovada mo rRNsovern4g P E eee T a eee be ee HD FRN220VG1 0 40 RN2 0vaio 4o P anaes TE 500 FRNSISVGIDAD MD FRNSS5VGIDAD HD Feson to 1200 rngoovertag MP E N500VG1 0 40 ao Fe HD N630VG1 0 40 AWARNING If no zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit break
128. cccconnnnnononononooonononnnnnnncnonnnnns 123 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION cccceccccccssssseccesseecesssnseccesesceeecssnseeceseseeeecesseeeeesecseeeseseeeeesesnaeeeeeeegs 124 Tel a OI q aaar A KODA EErEE aat 124 E DA A el e 124 Tar Periodic WYSE CTION o o ot dle eo al e ll 125 1 Periodic inspection 1 Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running ccoonnnooooonooonnonononnnnnnnonos 125 2 Periodical inspection 2 When the inverter is ON or it is TUODIOB cooonnooooooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 126 3 Checking the functional safety colonial cines 126 7 4 List of Periodic Replace dd loe LO e 127 TAL J dgmenton A A alae tersnatters 127 1 Measurement of discharging time of the DC link bus CapacitOT ooooooccccnnnocooconnnnonnononnnnnnononannnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnos 128 2 ON time counting of DC link bus capacitor nccuidecatcctsvunwecdsaedeusesaues thuyvvleddaadealsddesu ss vepavancdubunaiiee dneluddds envvaanmadias 128 A DA BET E A O SENA OEE E A 130 EE OEE E E AI E E AAS AT 130 i2 Loadine the battery AAA A aaa A Aar AFA 131 3 About marine or air transport of a lithium metal battery cccconnnnnnucoonooooonnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnanonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 133 7 5 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main es true 134 PHO INSUMOS SSA A a 135 7 7 Inquiries about Product and Ur o nado Nadi wahaonaes 136 Tek When making an Moyes serorek reee denea ea rrr a EE e E EEES r R aio ei 13
129. celeration Time 2 Deceleration Time 2 S curve 2 Start side S curve 2 End side P gain l constant Feedforward gain Input filter Detection filter Output filter Acceleration Time 3 Deceleration Time 3 S curve 3 Start side S curve 3 End side Drive control Y N N Dir Data setting range c 2 oat N amp i Change when running Y 0 000 to 5 000 s 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 0 to 50 0 to 50 10 0 1 to 500 0 times 1 10 000 to 10 000 s P control when C41 0 000 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 0 01 to 99 99 s 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 0 to 50 O 0 1 to 500 0 times 0 000 to 10 000 s 0 040 Y Y 0 005 Y 002 Y Y Y Y N Y N Y NN 5 00 NY vo vv o vivo rie y 0 040 Y Y Y Y Y 0 D D Z E JS Q a wm lo O 5 o S s O Q 5 00 i Y E rm E lt lt lt lt x lt VCwoPG lt lt lt lt x lt VCforPmsm 3 lt 0 002 Y Y ES 0 005 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y fy 4 vyin o yy vo i 00 Y Y 4 Y Y N Y P control when C41 0 000 0 01 to 99 99 s Y 5 00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s 0 01 to 99 99 s Y 5 00 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y 100 0 to 999 9 s 1000 to 3600 s poso Oe VV otos0 o dyfod o jiyi 4 4 Y N Y YY Y lt
130. ch causes a short circuiting or malfunction of electronic circuitry inside the inverter If a large vibration or shock exceeding the specified level is applied to the inverter for example due to a carrier running on seam joints of rails or blasting at a construction site the inverter structure gets damaged Halogen compounds such as methyl bromide used in fumigation corrodes some parts inside the inverter Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel with IP6X or air purge mechanism Place the panel in a room free from influence of the gases Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel Place the panel in a room free from influence of the conductive dust Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel that shuts out dust Ensure a maintenance space for periodical cleaning of the heat sink in panel engineering design Employ external cooling when mounting the inverter in a panel for easy maintenance and perform periodical maintenance Put a heating module such as a space heater in the panel Insert shock absorbing materials between the mounting base of the inverter and the panel for safe mounting When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer lumbe
131. closed 30A B C Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to output stop the motor for any error Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A 2 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals 30A and 30C are closed excited if the signal 1s active and Active OFF Terminals 30A and 30C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed Relay output 33 S a gt fae S O O Speed detection Table 2 2 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Name Symbol RJ 45 connector RS 485 communications port 1 Connector for keypad DX RS 485 DX communications port 2 Terminals on control PCB USB connector for the keypad USB port On the keypad PA Pulse generator PB 2 phase signal input PGP Pulse generator power supply PGM Common terminal FA FB Pulse generator output Functions Connector to join the keypad to the inverter Power is supplied to the keypad from the inverter via a remote operation extension cable Input output terminals to transmit data through the RS 485 multipoint protocol between the inverter and a computer or other equipment such as a PLC For setting of the terminating resistor refer to Section 2 2 8
132. control then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop Under vector control with without speed sensor readjust the speed control system F61 through F66 C40 through C45 C50 through C55 gt Disable the automatic control system s causing the vibration For exclusive motors for the FRENIC VG Check whether the setting of function code P02 matches the specification of the connected motor gt Correct the data of P02 For other motors gt Perform auto tuning Under vector control with without speed sensor Check whether automatic speed regulator ASR is properly configured F61 through F66 C40 through C45 C50 through C55 gt Readjust the ASR setting 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates Possible Causes 1 2 3 The specified carrier frequency is too low The surrounding temperature of the inverter was too high Resonance with the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency gt Increase the data of F26 Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted gt Ifitis over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is resonance with the mounting base Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone to find where the
133. ction if the motor 2 current inverter output current exceeds the operation level specified by Function code A33 This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection if the motor 3 current inverter output current exceeds the operation level specified by Function code A133 Motor 1 overload Motor 2 overload Motor 3 overload This function is activated if the output current exceeds the overload characteristic of the inverse time characteristic o It stops the inverter output depending upon pe A For manufacturers F80 the heat sink temperature and switching element temperature calculated from the output current 107 Related ae Alarm sub i A Num monitor Description code Detailed error cause function code This function detects a break in inverter output wiring during running and stops the 36 gE Output inverter output phase loss Available under vector control for IM with Loss of two or more phases speed sensor This function Stops the inverter output if the detected speed is 120 or over of the maximum speed 37 Overspeed This function is activated if the motor speed detected or estimated speed exceeds 120 adjustable with Function code H90 of the maximum speed F03 A06 A106 38 This function is activated if the DC link bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage detection level 405 VDC for 200 V series 820 VDC for 400 V series due to an increase of supply O
134. cuit filter OFL 000 0A No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed j Output circuit filter Max 50 m Max 100 m Max Max Aoo m If using the motor with encoder 100m below the wiring distance between the inverter and the motor This is due to the limitation on the specifications of the encoder If it exceeds 100m the action is required such as in the middle put the isolated converter If further longer secondary wiring is required consult your Fuji Electric representative 3 Precautions for surge voltage in driving a motor by an inverter especially for 400 V class motors If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Implement any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature reinforced insulation Connect a surge suppressor unit SSU50 100TA NS at the motor terminal Connect an output circuit filter OFL O00 OA to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less 4 When an output circuit filter 1s inserted in the secondary circuit or the wiring between the inverter
135. culation N REF2 Nmax 10V 3 Reference speed 4 ASR input N REF4 Nmax 10V 4 Detected speed 2 ASR input N FB2 Nmax 10V 5 Detected line speed LINE N4 Nmax 10V 6 Torque current command Torque ammeter one way deflection IT REF 150 10V 7 Torque current command Torque ammeter two way deflection IT REF 150 10V 8 Torque command Torque meter two way deflection T REF t 150 10V 9 Torque command Torque meter one way deflection T REF 150 10V 10 Motor current I AC 200 10V 1 Motor voltage V AC 200 10V 12 Input power Motor output PWR 200 10V 13 DC link bus voltage V DC 800V 10V 14 10V test voltage output P10 10 VDC equivalent 15 10V test voltage output N10 10 VDC equivalent 6 Motor temperature TMP M 200 C 10V 28 Torque bias balance adjustment Available soon TBL 150 10V 29 Torque bias gain adjustment Available soon TBG 150 10V 0 Universal AO U AO 31 37 Custom Ao1 Ao7 C AO1 to C AO7 8 Input Powel PWR IN 200 10V 40 PID output value PID OUT 200 10V Refer to Terminal Ao1 function cae rR HENN KUNU HURE EA KUNN ME ce lt o K o lt 0 to 40 Refer to Terminal Ao1 1 function to Terminal Ao1 1 0 to 40 Refer to Terminal Ao1 1 function 0 to 0 to 40 Refer to Terminal Ao1 function 0 to 40 Refer to Terminal Ao1 function to Terminal Ao1 function Refer to Terminal Ao1 f
136. d control duration F39 elapses due to hunting caused by high response in low speed operation Accordingly the inverter will not reach the stop conditions so that it enters the deceleration mode again and continues running If any of the above problems occurs adjust the ASR control parameters to appropriate values and use the speed mismatch alarm function in order to alarm trip the inverter switch the control parameters by speed or judge the detection of a stop speed by commanded values when the actual speed deviates from the commanded one An accident or injuries could occur Torque control mode ACAUTION e When the motor is rotated by load side torque exceeding the torque command under torque control turning the run command OFF may not bring the stop conditions so that the inverter may continue running To shut down the inverter output switch from torque control to speed control and apply a decelerate to stop or coast to stop command An accident or injuries could occur General precautions AXCAUTION Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual C Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as
137. d EN2 inputs OFF which usually brings the inverter into the Safe Torque Off STO state If the misalignment of the EN1 and EN2 inputs is within 50 ms no alarm occurs if it is more than 50 ms the inverter interprets it as a logic discrepancy outputting an alarm 2 The alarm can be cleared by restarting the inverter Power OFF Power ON Run command Run Siop Emergency stop OFF ON ON button id Input to EN1 ON OFF OFF ON Input to EN2 ON i poss 50 ms ELF alarm No alarm Alarm issued No alarm Alarm issued i Safe Torque Off Safe Torque Off Wait for a run l t tput R nverter outpu unning STO STO comm rid Figure 8 4 5 Alarm Caused by Logic Discrepancy and Inverter Output State 156 8 4 6 Prevention of restarting To prevent the inverter from restarting just by turning the emergency stop button OFF configure the Enable input circuit as shown below Figure 8 4 7 shows the timing scheme for prevention of restarting Assigning the HLD Enable 3 wire operation to any digital input terminal and setting the E01 data to 6 sets up the HLD function at the X1 terminal After the FWD comes ON with the HLD being ON even turning the FWD OFF keeps the inverter running due to the HLD Turning the emergency stop button ON under the condition causes the motor to coast to a stop After that turning the emergency stop button OFF no longer starts the inverter to run To run the inverter turn the FWD ON again FRENIC
138. d to any of digital input terminals Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 35 An alarm function of external equipment was activated Wrong connection or poor contact in external alarm signal wiring Incorrect setting of function code data The surrounding temperature exceeded the range of the braking resistor specification The capacity of the braking resistor is insufficient IN 11 Li Li Inverter overload What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the operation of external equipment gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred Check if the external alarm signal wiring 1s correctly connected to the terminal to which the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned Any of E01 through E09 should be set to 9 Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly Check whether the normal negative logic of the external signal matches that of the THR command specified by El4 gt Ensure the matching of the normal negative logic Measure the temperature around the braking resistor gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the inverter Reconsider the capacity and ED of the braking resistor gt Review the braking resistor Problem Electronic thermal overload protection for inverter activated Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The surrounding temperature exceeded the range of the inverter specification Excessive to
139. der vector control w o speed sensor and V f control 61h Detection mode Oor 1 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed Fixed at 1 under V f control S ow HA ARA RRA AAA AAA PO E IE A E a E eee 24h h 30RY Drive Mode kl 25h 60h Stop Speed Speed i Wi 27h 62h Zero speed control holding time 0 00 to 10 00 s 0 50 Y Applies to when timing the application of the mechanical brake 28h 63h Torque Limiter Mode 1 2 jOto3 44 0 Disable limiter 1 Torque limit 2 Power limit 3 Torque current limit 0 to 3 0 Level 1 to all four quadrants 1 Level 1 to driving Level 2 to braking 2 Level 1 to upper limit Level 2 to lower limit 3 Level 1 Level 2 switchable to all four quadrants Levels 1 and 2 are specified by the source defined by F42 and F43 respectively 0Oto5 0 Function code F44 1 Ai TL REF1 2 DIA card 3 DIB card 4 Communications link 5 PID output Ea 29h 64h Torque Limiter Mode 2 1 1 1 2Ah 65h Torque Limiter Level 1 Source 1 1 S N 2Bh 66h Torque Limiter Level 2 Source 0to5 0 Function code F45 1 Ai TL REF2 2 DIA card 3 DIB card 4 Communications link 5 PID output A ada fe ES E E E pK zp z lt kl ooo zz tet tet tt k 150 2Ch __67h TorqueLimierLevelt 7 20h _68h TorqueLimiterLevel2 1 feos 2Eh 69h Mechanical Loss Compensation 2Fh 30h 31h ES lt x 6Ah Torque Bias T1 1 300 00 to 300 00 Torqu
140. directory having no subdirectories 1 Subdirectory 2 or more Parent directory having the specified number of subdirectories Allowable data setting range and definition of each data Indicates whether the function code data can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when running Y Possible N Impossible Default setting Data preset by factory default If data is changed from the factory default it is displayed with an asterisk on the keypad Using function code H03 reverts changed function code data to the default values Data copying Indicates whether or not the function code data can be copied when you copy the data stored in the keypad memory of a source inverter to other destination inverters Initialization Indicates whether or not the function code data can be initialized to the default value by function code H03 Data initialization Y Possible N Impossible Format type Indicates a format type to be used to refer to or change function code data via the communications link Drive control Availability Indicates whether or not the function code is available to the individual drive controls Y Available N Not available Drive controls VC w PG Vector control for induction motor IM with speed sensor VC w o PG Vector control for induction motor IM without speed sensor V f V f control for induction motor IM VC for PMSM Vector control for permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM wit
141. displaying any alarm or issuing an alarm output for any alarm Ta This function is activated if a CPU error 0001 t This function is activated if a communications error occurs due to Network noise when the inverter is being driven via E de C VG OU the T Link SX bus E SX bus or CC Link p ee error 0004 User s Manual Chapter 6 This function is activated o f a 0001 Communications ifan RS 485 communications error occurs error timeout when the inverter is being driven via the RS 485 RS 485 and Function code H32 is set to 131 amp 5 communicat any of 0 through 2 SONS SII if Function code H38 is set within the Communications range of 0 1 to 60 0 s and the 0007 enor ranstussion Mal ESR error communications link breaks for the specified period or longer 105 Related ae Alarm sub Num monitor Description aak Detailed error cause function code This function is activated l i A Option mounting if two or more network options T Link error SX bus E SX bus and CC Link are mounted if the SW configuration is the same on two Auto tuning failed or more PG options More than one PG option can be mounted 14 DUON E H01 error if auto tuning Function code H01 is attempted when any of the digital input For manufacturers signals BX STOPI STOP2 and STOP3 is ON if auto tuning is selected with Function code HO1 but the key on the keypad is not pressed within 20 second
142. ds right values Shift to Menu 5 MAINTENANCE and confirm that the main capacitor capacity is 100 CAP 100 CNote If the measurement has failed 1 is entered into H80 Remove the factor of the failure and conduct the measurement again Hereafter each time the inverter is turned OFF it automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor if the above conditions are met Periodically check the relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor with Menu 5 MAINTENANCE in Programming mode CNote The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H104 back to the default setting Bit 0 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 4 2 the inverter can issue an early warning of lifetime alarm LIFE at one of the transistor output terminals Y 1 to Y4 and Relay output terminals Y5A Y5C as soon as any of the levels specified in Table 7 4 2 has been exceeded The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan provided on 200 V class series inverters with a capacity of 45 kW or above on 400 V class series inverters with a capacity of 75 kW or above has been detected 129 7 4 2 Battery 1 Outline The battery is used to back up the traceback memory and the calendar clock
143. e RN7 5VvG10 40 U oS wm 0 3 5 FRN11VvG10 40 RNISVG1O 40 RN18 5 G10 40 18 5 13 3 13 3 22 gt aN 95 N S o o o 5 N RN22VG10 40 N 0S N Nn o nn r n a o Z UI lt Q O A O Z UI oS lt Q O A 0S 40 FRN45VG10 40 10 6 1 2 Three phase 400V FRN55VG10 40 LD 1 RN75VG10 40 200 RN90VG10 40 ye A 27 RN110VG10 400 RN132VG1O 40 10 6 160 350 1 2 RN160VG10 40 424 7 200 48 FRN200VG10 40 500 22 700 Y RN220VG10 40 H Note 1 Control circuit terminals Tightening torque 6 1 1b in 0 7 Nm Recommended wire size AWG16 1 25 mm AO Nn eS Uy N O N nN Ty 09 g Q Q 2 A am E En sh HD 11 FRNIVGIO4O ris fe F F Prj Ty IZ EE SS Y gJ LoS N Oo NO N z E E 0 No al Z Iz mt Sy x OO x OlsiOle o HE 09 Note 2 A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the specifications No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 149 Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION Required torque Ae 2 ibin Ne Wire size AWG mm L1 R L2 S L3 T L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter type Power supply voltage Class J fuse size Circuit breaker trip size O Meintema Nominal applied motor Aux control power
144. e and when H30 0 and F02 0 47 3 2 Programming Mode Programming mode allows you to set and check function code data and monitor maintenance information and input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with a menu driven system Table 3 2 1 lists menus available in Programming mode Table 3 2 1 Menus Available in Programming Mode Selecting language Change the display language on the LCD monitor LANGUAGE 1 Configuring function codes Display and change the data of the function code selected DATA SET Display a function code and its data on the same screen Also this Checking function code data DATA CHECK menu is used to change the function code data or check whether the data has been changed from the factory default 3 Monitoring the running status Display the running information required for maintenance or test OPR MNTR running Checking I O signal status Display external interface information I O CHECK 4 5 Reading maintenance information Display maintenance information including cumulative run time MAINTENANCE Measuring load factor Measure the maximum output current average output current and LOAD FCTR average braking power 7 Reading alarm information Display recent four alarm codes Also this menu is used to view the ALM INF information on the running status at the time the alarm occurred Viewing causes of alarm Display the cause of the alarm ALM CAUSE Reading communication
145. e biases T1 to T3 are switchable with DI h Torque Bias T2 1 300 00 to 300 00 h Torque Bias T3 1 300 00 to 300 00 Torque Bias Startup Timer 0 00 to 1 00 s F50 specifies the time required for generating 300 eel Oo N J h torque aa A OS A UA ee IIS IES EE ES EE ES IRM IR IRE INES IES IES IR E EIN IE ES ESO EEES Oo IES ES ES ES EEES 33h FBh Torque Command Monitor 1 Oor1 Y Y Y 8 I YIYIY Y Polarity 0 Torque polarity 1 for driving for braking F51 specifies the polarity of torque related data output e g Ao monitor LED monitor and LCD monitor 79 Remarks Function code 1 al N F53 F54 F55 F56 Communica tions address 485 No 37h 38h Link No LED Monitor Display coefficient A Display coefficient B LED Monitor Display filter Item selection Display when stopped Drive control Cc 2 w Data setting range N amp E Vif Change when running Default setting 999 00 to 999 00 F52 specifies the conversion coefficient for displaying the load shaft speed and line speed on the LED monitor Display value Motor speed x 0 01 to 200 00 Only the setting range from 0 01 to 200 00 takes effect The specification out of the range is limited 999 00 to 999 00 Display coefficient A Maximum value Display coefficient B Minimum value F52 and F53 specify the conversion coefficients for displaying the PID
146. e duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles Note 10 The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals X1 to X9 transistor output terminals Y 1 to Y 4 and relay contact output terminals YS A C Note 11 Switching connectors in the main circuits For details refer to Section 2 2 7 Switching connectors Note 12 Slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Use these switches to customize the inverter operations For details refer to Section 2 3 11 Setting up the slide switches Note 13 The cooling fan power supply for motors of 7 5 kW or less is single phase Connect terminals FU and FV For motors of 7 5 kW or less 400 V class series the power voltage frequency rating of the cooling fan is 200 V 50 Hz or 200 230 V 60 Hz For motors of 11 kW or above 400 V class series it is 400 420 V 50 Hz or 400 440 V 60 Hz To use the fan with power voltage other than the above specifications a transformer is necessary Note 14 M 11 THC and ov CM PGM are insulated inside the inverter unit Note 15 Use the auxiliary contact manual reset of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC Note 16 Jumper bars are mounted between safety terminals EN1 EN2 and PS by factory default To use the safety function remove the jumper bars before connection of safety devices 15 Follow the pr
147. e keypad Follow the procedure given below 1 Configure the function codes as listed below Speed Command Source N1 0 Keypad N keys Moe Cote e When the inverter is in Programming or Alarm mode speed command setting with N keys is disabled To enable it switch to Running mode e If any of higher priority speed command sources multistep speed commands and speed commands via communications link is specified the inverter may run at an unexpected speed 2 Press the y Y key to display the current speed command on the LED monitor The least significant digit blinks 3 To change the speed command press the N key again When you start specifying the speed command with the Y key the least significant digit on the display blinks that it the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the Y Y key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit 4 To save the new setting into the inverter s memory press the key For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET 4 5 2 Setting up a speed command with an external potentiometer Follow the procedure given below 1 Configure the function codes as listed below 1 Analog voltage input to terminal 12 Speed Command Source N1 0 to 10
148. e keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the key If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 to 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC VG User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine The motor rotates when you start the auto tuning Check that it is not dangerous enough even when the motor is rotating An accident or injuries could occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and
149. e main circuit power terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T and control power terminals RO TO This function monitors the AC input power to the inverter and judges whether the AC input power main power is established Main Power When the main power is not established Shutdown whether to run the inverter or not can be Detection selected When the power is supplied via a PWM converter or the DC link bus there is no AC input In this case do not chang Notes All protective functions are automatically reset if the control power voltage decreases until the inverter control circuit no longer operates e The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm information e Stoppage due to a protective function can be reset by the RST key on the keypad or turning OFF and then ON between the X terminal to which RST is assigned and the CM This action is invalid if the cause of an alarm is not removed e The inverter cannot reset until the causes of all alarms are removed The causes of alarms not removed can be checked on the keypad e If an abnormal state is categorized as a light alarm the 30A B C does not operate 109 6 3 2 Possible causes of alarms checks and measures 7 ELF Functional safety circuit fault Alarm sub code 0001 Problem An error occurred in Enable input circuit Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Poor contact of the co
150. e or PG failure is detected when the 17 bit high E resolution ABS interface OPC VG1 SPGT is used This function protects the inverter when an AA input phase loss is detected If the connected 23 7 put p load is light or a DC reactor is connected to 21 Mockai This can be caused with keypad operation or oe the inverter this function may not detect input phase loss if any This function is activated when the reference torque current F44 F45 exceeds the specified level H140 and the detected speed 24 ii or reference one drops below the specified stop speed F37 and the state 1s kept for the specified duration H141 106 break error LED Related IEE Alarm sub monitor Name Description aak Detailed error cause function displays code This function works even at extremely low This function is activated when the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level 180 VDC for 200 V series 360 VDC for 400 V series HOENollagS Note that 1f the restart mode after momentary power failure is selected F14 3 4 or 5 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops temperatures approx 30 C or below E This function is activated if the thermistor wire breaks when the NTC thermistor is lected with Function code P30 A31 A131 NTC wire a for motor M1 M2 M3 0001 to y i For manufacturers This function stops the inverter output when 0004 Overcurrent the out
151. e position sensor offset value AXCAUTION Be sure to adjust the magnetic pole position offset see below for the adjustment procedure when the inverter runs for the first time after purchase after replacement of a motor PG or inverter Running the inverter with the magnetic pole position offset 010 A60 A160 not adjusted or with the position deviated greatly from the true value could run the motor in the opposite direction or out of control in the worst case An accident or injuries could occur When driving a PMSM for the first time be sure to set the magnetic pole position sensor offset value to the inverter with the following function code s beforehand M1 Function code 010 M2 Function code A60 M3 Function code A160 Depending on the situation Choose from the following three ways to set 1 Case where the magnetic pole position offset value is indicated on the label that came with the motor The magnetic pole position sensor offset value which differs according to motors is printed on the magnetic pole position label attached to the motor main circuit line U phase See Figure 4 4 1 As shown in Figure 4 4 2 there are two types of magnetic pole position labels mama 103 230 1 ET ABS MS SSRI TEL Figure 4 4 1 Magnetic Pole Position Offset Label Attaching Position Examples 1 12026002361 000 HAS ao 230 1 EI TRI MAREA AER RC Magnetic pole position Input the inverter s magnetic position of
152. e shown in Figure 2 2 16 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB To access the slide switches remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above open also the keypad enclosure For details on how to remove the front cover and how to open and close the keypad enclosure refer to Section 2 2 2 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide Figure 2 2 16 shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input output terminal configuration Tm SW8 SW7 ne M E SMA Figure 2 2 16 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB YH 6 o000000000000000000000000 y Switch Configuration and Factory Defaults ae e o e e i Vee OFF e Factory ok O OO 15V 1 Note To move a switch slider use a tool with a narrow tip e g a tip of tweezers Be careful not to touch other electronic Ye parts etc If the slider is in an ambiguous position the circuit is unclear whether it is turned ON or OFF and the digital input remains in an undefined state Be sure to place the slider so that it contacts either side of the switch SW2 and SWS are reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access them 38 Table 2 2 6 lists function of each slide
153. e the cursor to the desired item Change the date and time using the N and V keys Press key to establish the date and time If the relationship between the changed year month day and time is invalid CANNOT SET appears when the key 1s pressed After a second the screen automatically switches back to the submenu Tio The calendar clock can also be set with FRENIC VG Loader For details refer to the FRENIC VG Loader ac Instruction Manual 50 2 Selecting the display format 9 COMM INFO To display this menu screen press the key in Running mode to switch to 10 DATA COPY Programming mode 11 CHANGES E ie Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to 12 AV gt MENU SHIFT DATA TIME using the Y and Y keys Then press the key Press key to establish the desired menu lt DATE TIME gt PADJUST FORMAT AV gt SHIFT F lt DATE TIME gt Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to FORMAT ADJUST using the y and keys Then press the key gt FORMAT AV gt SHIFT F lt FORMAT gt yyyy4mm dd hh mm ss AV gt FORMAT SHIF Change the date format data using the Y and keys lt FORMAT gt lt List of date formats gt d _ ACA yyyy mm dd Year Month Date mm ss gt dd mm yyyy Date Month Year mm dd yyyy Month Date Year AV gt FORMAT SHIF mmm dd yyyy Month Date Year lt OFF gt No display lt FORMAT gt mm dd 7 yyyy hh mm ss AV gt FORMA
154. ectric com 2013 2
155. ed Inverter stopped LU 8 Torque polarity detected braking driving B D 9 Torque limiting TL 12 Keypad operation enabled K 14 Inverter ready to run RDY 15 Magnetic flux detected MF DT 16 Motor M2 selected SW M2 17 Motor M3 selected SW M3 18 Brake release signal BRK v 19 Alarm content 1 AL1 20 Alarm content 2 AL2 21 Alarm content 4 AL4 22 Alarm content 8 AL8 23 Cooling fan in operation FAN 24 Resetting TRY 25 Universal DO U DO 84 Mi ERNS YYY CALZE y Y inv BALAMAN Edrarara KANAMAM xiii xii y Y inv y Y vv KaL yiyi EARZEARA ANAMA ed xii y Y inn y Y viv MY y N Y xiii xiii AY xiii acapara y Y vv xii Remarks Function code E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 Communica tions address Name 485 Link No No 10Fh 85h Terminal Y1 Function ali Proa Dri laa e Alo a E to 84 oe Terminal Y1 Function 0 to 84 See Terminal Y1 Function aoh rerminal VS Function 1 01084 See Terminal Y1 Function N Data setting range 30 Under deceleration U DEC 33 Motor overload early warning ah 34 DB overload early warning DB OL 5 Link transmission error LK 6 In limiting under load adaptive control 7 In calculation under load adaptive control 8 Analog torque bias being held 9 to 48 Custom Do1 Do10 C DO1 to C DO1 50 Z phase detection completed Available soon 51 Multiplex system communications link being estab
156. eed agreement signal N AG3 0 000 to 5 000 s Specifies the off delay timer of the speed agreement signal N AG3 0 to 200 Ifthe NTC detection temperature of the motor fan having an NTC thermistor drops below this setting the inverter turns ON the axial fan stopped signal MFAN 89 os viv iii Mid 1000 0 100 0 100 IMM ARE AE ERE EME IRE EE E AE IES ES INE IE E E E E wo ad o o Remarks 5 3 3 C codes Control Functions Communica tions address 485 Link 201h h Jump Speed 1 4 0 to 30000 r min Y Y Y Enables the inverter to jump over a point on the reference speed in order to skip a resonance point of the driven machinery load and the motor speed Up to three different jump points can be specified 202 nmp Speed a oosoooomin vio fell EXCUSA ENE A o Mee Function code Q S C02 C03 C04 C05 C06 C07 C08 Cog C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C25 204h 205h 206h N O x y 215h 219h h 9Eh 9Fh AOh Ath A2h A3h A4h h h h h h h h h h h h D e c 0 gt 5 2 au qE Sls Olc A Default setting lt Change when running Format type VC w PG VC w o PG Vif lt VC for PMSM lt Hysteresis Width for Jump Speed 1 oto 1000rmin v o vo v v Multistep Speed 1 17 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 t
157. elated Detailed error cause function code Alarm sub code LED Num monitor Name Description displays This function is activated when a ground fault is detected in the inverter output circuit If the ground fault current is large the overcurrent protection may be activated 8 led This protective function is to protect the inverter For the sake of prevention of accidents such as human damage and fire connect a separate earth leakage protective relay or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB This function is activated when a memory error such as a data write error occurs Note The inverter memory uses a nonvolatile Memory memory that has a limited number of 0001 to 91 r o rewritable times 100 000 to 1 000 000 times 0008 For manufacturers Saving data with the full save function into the memory so many times unnecessarily will no longer allow the memory to save data causing a memory error This function is activated if a communications error occurs between the keypad and the inverter control circuit when eee NE DCR detected the start stop command given from the Keypad keypad is valid Function code F02 0 10 4 lt communicat Note Even if a keypad communications error F02 ions error occurs when the inverter is being driven via Wire break the control circuit terminals or the 0002 detected during communications link the inverter continues keypad operation running without
158. en if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation or freezing Precautions for temporary storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table 1 3 3 wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 If the inverter is to be stored in a high humidity environment put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in 2 above 2 Long term storage The long term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the surrounding temperature range should be within the range from 10 to 30 C This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deterioration 2 The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture Add a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70 3 If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the environment specified in Table 1 3 3
159. er ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise a fire could occur 6 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input primary circuit Avoid frequent ON OFF operation of the magnetic contactor MC in the input circuit otherwise the inverter failure may result If frequent start stop of the motor is required use FWD REV terminal signals or the keys on the inverter s keypad The frequency of the MC s ON OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes To assure 10 year or longer service life of the inverter it should not be more than once per hour CT From the system s safety point of view it is recommended to employ such a sequence that shuts down the K Ti gti Os i A magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals The sequence minimizes the secondary damage even 1f the inverter breaks When the sequence is employed connecting the MC s primary power line to the inverter s auxiliary control power input makes it possible to monitor the inverter s alarm status on the keypad e The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may trigger that of the inverter s internal parts e g charging resistor To avoid such a breakdown linkage introduce an MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if a DC link voltage establishment signal is not issued w
160. er s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or a fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise an electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident In general sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage 1 e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock AWARNINGA e Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wai
161. erring to the following setting 1 NOT EXECUTE appears on the LCD monitor In the case of M1 when H01 any of 2 to 4 P02 37 OTHER gt gt Function codes to be tuned are write protected Set P02 to 37 OTHER The JOG mode is selected The JOG indicator on the LCD monitor is lit Cancel the JOG mode by pressing the f A keys simultaneous keying gt gt If digital input signal JOG is ON turn it OFF 2 Alarm 4 Operation error occurs Have the setting PO1 3 009 1 H160 4 0 gt Set P01 3 009 1 H160 0 Any of digital input signals BX STOP1 STOP2 and STOP3 is ON Either one of Enable inputs EN1 and EN2 is OFF gt When any of BX STOPI STOP2 and STOP3 is ON and either of EN1 and EN2 is OFF no tuning starts The multiwinding motor drive system is selected No tuning is possible in the multiwinding motor drive system 3 Alarm Output wiring fault occurs A phase is missing in the connection between the inverter and the motor gt gt Connect the motor to the inverter correctly The brake is applied to the motor gt gt For auto tuning with the motor running H01 4 be sure to release the brake so that the motor can rotate The motor does not rotate The motor is vibrating Motor 1 M1 Need to be adjusted H161 M1 Draw current command H162 M1 Draw frequency gt Motor 1 M2 Need to be adjusted H171 M2 Draw current command H172 M2 Draw frequency gt Moto
162. ers for Measurement of Main Circuit Output secondary side Voltage Current My Py Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter AU AV AW VU VV VW WU WW Digital AC power meter Digital AC power meter Digital AC power meter P O L1 R NE UO Connection of Meters 134 DC link bus voltage P N DC voltmeter V Moving coil type It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged 7 6 Insulation Test Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment avoid making a Megger test at the customer s site If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit observe the following instructions otherwise the inverter may be damaged A withstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong When the withstand voltage test is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit 1 Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail before measurement 2 If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7 6 1 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and
163. esign values The motor ratings are printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them After configuring the function codes perform motor parameter auto tuning H01 3 or 4 For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes Function M1 Drive Control M2 Drive Control M3 Drive Control 37 Others ES MP Seleeon No modification is required for M2 or M3 Motor te be appiieg M1 Pulse Resolution 0 Vector control for IM 0 Vector control for IM with speed sensor with speed sensor M2 Pulse Resolution Match the specifications of the PG to be used 1024 M3 Pulse Resolution M1 Thermistor Type M2 Thermistor Type 0 No thermistor 1 NTC thermistor M3 Thermistor Type M1 Rated Speed M2 Rated Speed 1500 r min M3 Rated Speed M1 Rated Voltage ait ee of nominal applied M2 Rated Voltage M3 Rated Voltage M1 Rated Capacity Motor ratings Me Rated Capacity printed on the nameplate of the motor M3 Rated Capacity Rated current of nominal applied M1 Rated Current motors M2 Rated Current M3 Rated Current M1 Poles M2 Poles 4 poles M3 Poles M1 Maximum Speed M2 Maximum Speed Machinery design values 1500 r min M3 Maximum Speed Note
164. etting the inverter issues the detection signal Units place Speed disagreement alarm 86 Remarks Function code E49 E50 E51 E52 E53 E54 E55 E56 E57 E58 E59 E60 E61 E62 E63 E64 E65 E66 E67 E68 Communica tions address ey Link No Name 12Fh 9Ch Torque Detection Level 2 1 130h 9Dh Magnetic Flux Detection Level 132 133 ia 140h 141h 142h a Ai3 Function sat hs Ai4 Function 1 ha A Up Down Limiter A h Terminal Ai1 Function h Terminal Ai2 Function A A Ai2 Filter hfaia Filter Up Down Limiter Ai1 A Data setting range 0 to 300 10 to 100 If the magnetic flux value calculated exceeds this setting the inverter issues the detection signal 0 to 27 Shut down input sighal o gt Cc x D Ss lt n jo 4 4 a n 4 Q AUX N1 10V Nmax 2 Auxiliary speed setting 2 AUX N2 10V Nmax 3 Torque limiter level 1 TL REF1 10V 150 4 Torque limiter level 2 TL REF2 10V 150 5 ATA bias TB REF 10V 150 8 rep speed 1 for UP DOWN control CRP N1 10V Nmax 9 Creep speed 2 for UP DOWN control CRP N2 10V Nmax 10 Magnetic flux reference MF REF 10V 100 11 Detect line speed LINE N 10V Nmax 12 Motor temperature M TMP 10V 200 C 13 Speed override N OR 10V 50 14 Universal Ai 10V 4000 h 15 PID feedback 1 PID FB1 10V 20000 d
165. fset 010 A60 A160 Magnetic pole position Input the inverter s magnetic position offset 010 A60 A160 matea 230 1 EI DMA eB RAL Figure 4 4 2 Magnetic Pole Position Offset Labels Cnote Replacing the motor or encoder requires adjustment of the magnetic pole position offset again 69 2 Case where the automatically adjust magnetic pole position offset value If there is no display label offset pole position or When PG is mounted or replaced at the site the magnetic pole position offset value is adjusted automatically by tuning function H71 5 Tuning is successful the data is automatically saved to 010 magnetic pole position offset lt Conditions that magnetic pole position offset tuning are available gt 1 The equipment that do not become dangerous even if the motor rotate 2 There is no load change of the equipment motor rotation is stable If the above condition is not satisfied it is necessary to remove the motor from the equipment 3 PG encoder is only supported in ABUVW encoder lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Before the start of tuning set the following function code P01 3 Vector control SM 009 1 ABUVW encoder lt F02 0 KEYPAD operation 2 Start tuning Set H71 5 Magnet pole position tuning for SM driving Change the H71 data to the desired value by pressing the N keys or 6 keys simultaneous keying and then press the key 3 Pre
166. gulation flowing into the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 8 1 2 Power Source and Regulation Table 8 1 2 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation Applicable Three phase 200V FRNO 75G10 20 DCR2 0 75 When supplying three phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 400 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated Note 1 A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination For details refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 Note 2 Inverter types marked with y in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A 14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditionally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with To connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data contact your Fuji Electric representative 8 1 3 Compliance with the low voltage directive in the EU General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive E Note If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters mar
167. h speed sensor For details about the format type refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 2 4 Data format list TT 9 3 5 3 1 Function code FOO F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F07 F08 F10 F11 F12 F14 F17 F18 F20 F21 F22 Function Code Tables F codes Fundamental Functions KA tions KA Name 485 Link No No AN Data Protection Speed Command N1 Operation Method 42 le Yin o yyy Y f control U lt o Cc 2 w Data setting range N 5 E Change when running Oor 1 0 Enable data change 1 Protect data This write protects data from the keypad H29 defines write protect from the communications link T link RS 485 etc 0to9 Keypad N O keys Analog input to terminal 12 0 to 10V Analog input to terminal 12 0 to 10V UP DOWN control Initial speed 0 UP DOWN control Initial speed Last value UP DOWN control Initial speed Creep speed 1 or 2 6 DIA card input 7 DIB card input 8 N REFV input to terminal Ai1 9 N REFC input to terminal Ai2 zg F01 defines the command source that specifies a speed command Oor 1 0 Keypad EREET keys Local mode 1 External signals to terminals FWD REV Remote Y mode F02 defines a run command source Switching between the Remote and Local modes is also possible with the simultaneous depression of the t keys on the keypad which changes the F02 data ev
168. h the Radio Waves Act South Korea 3 Compliance with the Radio Waves Act South Korea This product complies with the Radio Waves Act South Korea Note the following when using the product in south korea The product is for business use Class A and meets the electromagnetic compatibility requirement The seller and the user must note the above point and use the product in a place except for home Only the following type of the products is applicable to this certification Type FRNAAAVGIS DJ FRNAAAVGIS OE A is filled with inverter output power and O is also for what power supply voltage 2 or 4 is BABS dal Ape AE OO aa 8 E obo Fo FAL Ra o AE ATRA W DAR ARIZA NA ES ALB AE das FAJA YAA 71899 ASAA APS she AS 54 Uc az BA FRNAAAVG1S 04 FRNAAAVG1S DE 2 AF4 Ae AUT AS UNAS Oe Adee ASES 5412 Be 47 271808 rir 151 8 4 Compliance with Functional Safety Standard 8 4 1 General In FRENIC VG series of inverters opening the hardware circuit between terminals EN1 PS or between terminals EN2 PS stops the output transistor coasting the motor to a stop EN1 Enable input 1 EN2 Enable input 2 This is the Safe Torque Off STO function prescribed in IEC EN60204 1 Category 0 Uncontrolled stop and compliant with Functional Safety Standard Using the Safe Torque Off STO function eliminates the need of external safety circuit breakers while conventional inverters need those breakers to configure the Functional
169. h the desired menu Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to FORMAT using the Y and Y keys Then press the key Change the date format data using the Y and keys lt List of date formats gt e gt yyyy mm dd Year Month Date gt dd mm y y y y Date Month Year mm dd y y y y z Month Date Year mmm dd yyyy Month Date Year SOFF gt No display Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to lt OFF gt using the y and keys Then press the key 52 lt FORMAT gt lt oFF gt hh mm ss AV gt FORMAT SHIF lt FORMAT gt lt OFF gt hh mm ss AV gt SHIFT F lt FORMAT gt lt OFF gt lt OFF gt AV gt SHIFT F lt FORMAT gt lt OFF gt lt OFF gt STORING AV gt FORMAT SHIF lt DATE TIME gt ADJUST BS FORMAT AV gt SHIFT Press key to establish the newly specified date format Change the time format data using the Y and Y keys lt List of time formats gt 0 24 hour minutes seconds 0 12 hour minutes seconds AM PM AM PM 0 12 hour minutes seconds No display Move the cursor flashing rectangle at the left of the screen to lt OFF gt using the y and keys Then press the key After a second the screen automatically switches back to the submenu 53 Chapter 4 TEST RUN PROCEDURE Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below Check prior to powering on gt See Section
170. hanged First turn those terminals OFF and then change the F02 data 2 Connect the run forward switch between terminals FWD and CM and the run reverse switch between REV and CM Note Make sure that the SINK SOURCE slide switch SW1 is turned to the SINK position If SW1 is in the SOURCE position the inverter cannot run the motor 3 Turn the run forward switch or run reverse switch ON short circuit to run the motor in the forward or reverse direction respectively LJ For precautions in wiring refer to Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER LJ For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET 15 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Groups and Function Codes F xkokok Ne A Code number Function code group Function code group Remarks Fundamental functions F00 to F85 Extension terminal functions E codes E01 to E118 E51 E52 E55 E56 E59 E60 E63 E64 E67 E68 For the OPC VG1 AIO option E72 E73 E77 E78 E82 E83 E103 E104 E107 E108 coc Motor Parameter functions MI POI to P51 Alternative motor parameter A codes AO1 to A171 For M2 and M3 functions M2 M3 option functions o codes 005 to 0197 001 to 004 005 006 to 008 e g OPC VG1 TL OPC VG1 CCL 033 034 050 For the high speed serial communication terminal block OPC VG1 TBSI
171. has been done gt Configure all the function codes correctly Make a note of function code data currently configured and then initialize all function code data using H03 gt After the above process reconfigure function codes one by one checking the running status of the motor Check the setting of the automatic operation OFF function H11 gt Set the data of H11 to 2 Coast to a stop when a run command is turned OFF or 4 Coast to a stop when a run command is turned OFF under torque control 10 When the motor accelerates or decelerates the speed is not stable Possible Causes Under vector control with without speed sensor 1 The control constants of the automatic speed regulator ASR are inadequate What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the automatic speed regulator ASR is properly adjusted under speed control gt Readjust the ASR F61 to F66 C40 to C45 C50 to C55 11 The motor stalls during acceleration Possible Causes Under vector control with without speed sensor 1 Function code settings do not agree with the motor characteristics Under V f control 2 The specified acceleration time is too short Under V f control 3 The moment of inertia of the load is large Under V f control 4 Large voltage drop on wires Under V f control 5 The torque of the load is large What to Check and Suggested Measures For exclusive motors for the FR
172. he initial At periodic LCD page 2 capacitor Measures the discharging time of capacitance at shipment inspection CAP Capacity the DC link bus capacitor when H104 the main power is shut down and Bit 0 0 calculates the capacitance 85 or lower of the reference During ordinary LCD page 2 capacitance under ordinary operation CAP Capacity operating conditions at the user H104 site Bit 0 1 ON time counting Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary LCD page 8 Counts the time elapsed when the 10 years operation CAPEH Elapsed voltage is applied to the DC link time bus capacitor while correcting it CAPRH Time according to the capacitance remaining before the measured above end of life Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed when the Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary LCD page 3 capacitors on voltage is applied to the 10 years operation TCAP Cumulative printed circuit capacitors while correcting it run time boards according to the surrounding temperature Cooling fans Counts the run time of the Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary LCD page 3 cooling fans 10 years operation TFAN Cumulative run time 127 The service life of the DC link bus capacitor can be judged by the measurement of discharging time or ON time counting 1 Measurement of discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter s internal lo
173. he one attempted was active and the run command was stopped Or a speed command was active No analog speed command input Under V f control 5 The reference speed was below the starting or stop speed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary gt If only the auxiliary control power input is supplied also supply the main power to the inverter Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O CHECK using the keypad Input a run command Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted Correct the run command source Set the data of F02 to 1 Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly Make sure that the sink source slide switch SW1 on the control printed circuit board control PCB is properly configured Refer to Section 2 3 11 Setting up the slide switches y yy yy Referring to the run command block diagram given in the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 check the higher priority run command using Menu 2 DATA CHECK and Menu 4
174. hermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed 2 Warranty range 1 In the event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms of this warranty may not apply The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company or the results from using such a program The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not fore
175. hould be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m you should apply basic insulation for the control circuits of the inverter The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m Use wires listed in IEC60364 5 52 Power supply voltage Three phase 200 V Recommended wire size mm2 Main circuit MCCB or Main power RCD ELCB 1 input 2 L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding SG Rocas 1 e 11010 E FRN2 22VG10 20 10 Inverter type Rated current Nominal applied motor HD LD mode Control circuit Aux control power Aux fan power Inverter outputs DC reactor Braking resistor FRN3 7VG10 20 afeta a a FRN5 5VG10 20 RN7 5VG1O 20 N1i1VG1O 20 N15VG1O 20 RN18 5VG10 20 FRN22VG10 20 FRN37V G10 20 TEN TEN o 7 SB 120x2 120x2 FRN45VG1 0 20 FRN55VG10 20 HD 10
176. hout speed sensor requires auto tuning regardless of the motor type Even driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control requires auto tuning Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values The motor ratings are printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control Configure the function codes as listed below and perform motor parameter auto tuning H01 2 For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes Function Name Function code data Factory default code POI M1 Drive Control A01 1 Vector control for IM 0 Vector control for IM without speed sensor with speed sensor M2 Drive Control A101 M3 Drive Control 37 Others P02 j ra DNS No modification is required for M2 or M3 Motor fo De applied P30 M1 PG Pulse Resolution A31 M2 PG Pulse Resolution 1 NTC thermistor 1 NTC thermistor A131 M3 PG Pulse Resolution F03 M1 Thermistor Type A06 M2 Thermistor Type Machinery design values 1500 r min M3 Thermistor Type Note For a test driving of the motor increase M1 Maximum Speed values so that they are lo
177. ic representative to repair the motor s cooling fan Check whether decreasing the torque boost P35 A55 A155 decreases the output current but does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the torque boost P35 A55 A155 119 Possible Causes Under V f control 3 Continuous running in extremely slow speed 4 Overload Under vector control with without speed sensor 5 Function code settings do not agree with the motor characteristics 6 Motor defective What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the running speed of the inverter gt Change the speed setting or replace the motor with an exclusive motor for inverters motor with separately powered cooling fan Measure the inverter output current gt Reduce the load gt Increase the inverter capacity and motor capacity For exclusive motors for the FRENIC VG Check whether the setting of function code P02 matches the connected motor gt Correct the data of P02 For other motors gt Perform auto tuning Check whether the inverter output voltages U V and W are well balanced Repair or replace the motor 9 The motor does not run as expected Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data 2 Under torque control the inverter keeps output although the run command is OFF What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that function codes are correctly configured and no unnecessary configuration
178. in M1 I time A O 5 A N TI le s 5 S wm _ 5 U oO 5 8 oO N Zz A M2 I time 433h DAh M1 load inertia M2 load inertia D5h Line Speed Feedback Selection 437h h 2 Zero Speed Control Gain For details refer to X terminal command LOCK NIN assigned by any of E01 to E13 0 to 100 pulses eit Oor1 mm lt 438h A w al 5 Completion range h Overvoltage Suppression 43Ah h Overcurrent Suppression 43Ch h Load Adaptive Control 7 Definition 1 43Dh Definition 2 0 Winding up in forward rotation 1 Winding down in forward rotation 1 0 to 999 9 m min AE PRAIRIE PIBES ES 0 Disable ME 1 Enable Oor 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 0to3 0 Disable 1 Method 1 2 Method 2 1 0 00 to 600 00 t LY NINTY 5010 1 20 AER INIT 500 to 1 000 a 0 500 YY 4 VINNY 0 00 to 600 00 t Oor 1 NIN 11 Y Y Y Y Setting H68 to 1 deletes all of the alarm history alarm causes and alarm information held in the inverter memory After that the H68 data automatically reverts to 0 h Reserved 1 0 to 9999 YIN YIYINIY Reserved Do not access this function code h Reserved 2 0 to 10 N NIN 62 Y Y Y Y Reserved Do not access this function code 3 Method 3 PG Detection Circuit Self diagnosis 0 or 1 N Y Y 225 Y Y N Y 0 Disable 1 Enable This function performs self diagnosis of the speed detection circuit by pulse generator signals PA P
179. ing procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Replace the cooling fan Contact your Fuji Electric representative Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally Replace the cooling fan Contact your Fuji Electric representative Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL 112 Under vector control with without speed sensor 8 Reference speed fluctuating Under vector control with without speed sensor 9 The control constants of the automatic speed regulator ASR are inadequate 10 Wrong wiring to the PG 11 Wrong wiring to the motor 12 The magnetic pole position of the permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM is out of place 38 GU Overvoltage Check whether the reference speed is fluctuating gt Increase the ASR input filter setting F64 C43 C53 C63 Check whether the actual speed overshoots or undershoots the commanded one gt Readjust the ASR ASR gain constant of integration etc Check the wiring to the PG gt Correct the wiring Refer to Section 4 2 2 Mounting direction of a pulse generator PG and PG signals Check the wiring to the motor gt Correct the wiring It is also possible to use H75 Phase sequence configuration of main circuit output wires Check the magnetic pole position gt Adjust the magnetic pole position 010 A60 A160 Refer to Sectio
180. inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Inspection Interval Table 7 1 1 lists the inspection intervals and check items as a guide Table 7 1 1 List of Inspections Inspection type Daily inspection Every day See Section 7 2 See Section 7 3 Decennial inspection Every 10 years Replacement of cooling fans 2 Replacement of DC link bus capacitors and close checks 1 The decennial inspection except replacement of cooling fans should be performed only by the persons who have finished the Fuji Electric training course Contact the sales agent where you purchased the product or your nearest Fuji Electric representative 2 For the standard replacement interval of cooling fans refer to Section 7 4 List of Periodic Replacement Parts CNote The replacement intervals are based on the inverter s service life estimated at a surrounding temperature of 40 C at 100 HD mode inverters or 80 MD LD mode inverters of full load In environments with a surrounding temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may be shorter Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life 7 2 Daily Inspection Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is running or the power is ON Table 7 2 1 lists daily inspection items Table 7 2 1 Daily Inspection List
181. iometer 1s used for speed setting Speed switching or multistep speed command was enabled The wiring length between the inverter and the motor is too long The machinery is hunting due to vibration caused by low rigidity of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters Function code settings do not agree with the motor characteristics Load is fluctuating What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that there is no noise on the control signal wires connecting to external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals Check whether the external speed command potentiometer is malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Check whether the relay signal for switching the speed command is chattering gt Ifthe relay contact is defective replace the relay Check whether auto torque boost is enabled P35 A55 A155 gt Perform auto tuning gt Under V f control disable the automatic control system select manual torque boost then check that the motor vibration stops Make the output wires as short as possible Once disable all the automatic control systems speed control auto torque boost current limiter torque limiter and droop
182. is function code setting Select M2 X terminal functions disabled Select M3 X terminal functions disabled Select a motor to be used from M1 M2 and M3 81 Remarks Function code F80 F81 F82 F83 F84 F85 Drive control Data setting range Default setting Initialization lt lt lt kl K fF K Datacopying copying C R a E A Change when running o tions o Name Dir 485 Link No No h Switching between HD MD and LD Drive Modes 0 2 HD High duty mode overload capability 150 200 1 LD Low duty mode overload capability 120 3 MD Medium duty mode overload capability 150 F80 switches the drive mode between the HD MD 0 0 to 150 0 r min Y F82 specifies the dead zone for analog speed setting on terminal 12 to limit the speed setting specified by F82 to 0 r min 0 000 to 5 000 s ie 0 005 0 000 to 9999 0 010 F84 specifies a display coefficient for displaying the input watt hour data M116 M116 F84 x M115 Input watt hour kWh Specification of 0 000 clears the input watt hour data 0 000 to 1 000 s 0 100 Y F85 specifies a display filter for calculated torque output for monitoring LED monitor and LCD 52h h Dead Zone for Speed Setting on Terminal 12 53h h Filter for Speed Setting on Terminal 12 54h h Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Display Filter for Calculated Torque A ee lt p XX Xv PC po XXX XV wo PS AA RR RAR doo lt P Xf
183. is right gt Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings Check whether the data of torque limiter related function codes F40 through F45 is correctly configured and the TL2 TL1 terminal command Select torque limiter level 1s correct gt Correct the data of F44 or F45 or enter the F40 CCL terminal command Cancel F40 Torque limiter mode 1 Check the data of function codes F17 F18 and E53 to E60 gt Correct the bias and gain settings Check whether modifying the reference speed setting from the keypad changes the reference speed gt Modify the reference speed setting by pressing the f and keys Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter for the phase sequence wire breaks shielding and twisting gt Correct the wiring Refer to Section 4 2 2 Mounting direction of a pulse generator PG and PG signals Check the phase sequence U V and W of the main circuit wires between the inverter and the motor gt Connect the inverter output terminals U V and W to the motor input terminals U V and W respectively For exclusive motors for the FRENIC VG Check whether the data of function code P02 matches the specification of the connected motor gt Correct the data of P02 For other motors gt Perform auto tuning 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes Under V f control Under vector control without speed sensor 1 Wrong wiring to
184. ithin three seconds after the MC is switched on For the braking transistor built in type of inverters assign a transistor error output signal DBAL on inverter s programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input circuit 7 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter output secondary circuit If a magnetic contactor MC is inserted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes it should be switched on and off when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped This prevents the contact point from getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC The MC should not be equipped with any main circuit surge killer Applying a commercial power to the inverter s output circuit breaks the inverter To avoid it interlock the MC on the motor s commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit so that they are not switched ON at the same time 8 Surge absorber surge killer Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter s output secondary lines 10 1 3 4 Noise reduction If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other
185. ithout speed sensor E For Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control Configure the function codes as listed below The machinery design values should match your machinery ones For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes code PO1 M1 Drive Control AOl M2 Drive Control A101 M3 Drive Control M1 Selection Motor to be applied Motor to be applied P28 M1 PG Pulse Resolution A30 M2 PG Pulse Resolution M3 PG Pulse Resolution 0 Vector control for IM 0 Vector control for IM with speed sensor with speed sensor M1 Thermistor Type M2 Thermistor Type 1 NTC thermistor 1 NTC thermistor M3 Thermistor Type M1 Maximum Speed Machinery design values M2 Maximum Speed Note For a test driving of the motor 1500 r min M3 Maximum Speed increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the Acceleration Time 1_ Note specified time is short the inverter may not 58 For motors except Fuji VG motor To use motors except a Fuji VG motor when their motor parameters to be set to function codes are known perform auto tuning to automatically configure them Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery d
186. k that the motor is stopped and cut off the input power to the inverter beforehand Checking wiring If wiring is changed in the initial start up or maintenance be sure to perform the following test with the inverter stopped Turn each of terminals EN1 and EN2 OFF open and ON short and check on the I O check screen of the keypad that the relevant section turns signal ON and signal OFF respectively 153 8 4 3 Functional safety performance Table 8 4 1 lists the safety performance values required by the Functional Safety Standard Table 8 4 1 Functional Safety Performance Safe Torque Off STO IEC EN61800 5 2 2007 60 ms or less From input to the terminal to Safe Torque Off Safety integrity level SIL 2 IEC EN61800 5 2 2007 PFH 2 00 x 10 Probability of a dangerous random hardware failure per hour IEC EN61800 5 2 2007 Performance level PL d EN ISO13849 1 2008 Mean time to dangerous random 150 years EN ISO13849 1 2008 hardware failure MTTFd Hardware fault tolerance HFT1 IEC EN61800 5 2 2007 Safe failure fraction SFF 60 or above Type B IEC EN61800 5 2 2007 Ae capability IEC EN61508 2010 e The proof test refers to a periodical test to detect safety related failures e The PFH is calculated with the Siemens standard model SN29500 154 8 4 4 Inverter output state when Safe Torque Off STO is activated Turning the emergency stop button ON turns EN1 and EN2 OFF bringing the inve
187. ked with CE are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC 141 Compliance with European Standards Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems PDS Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN61800 5 1 2007 AWARNING A The ground terminal amp G should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection To prevent the risk of hazardous accidents that could be caused by damage of the inverter install the specified fuses in the supply side primary side according to the following tables Breaking capacity Min 10 kA Rated voltage Min 500 V 10 aed Inverter type MD LD motor mode kW Fuse rating 15 1EC60269 4 FRNS 5VG1 0 20 FRN7 5VG1 0 20 FRN11VG10 20 FRN15VG10 20 FRN18 5VG10 20 N FRN30VG10 20 125 1EC60269 4 160 1EC60269 4 160 1EC60269 4 200 1EC60269 4 250 1EC60269 4 250 1EC60269 4 FRN22VG10 20 FRN45VG10 20 FRNS5VG1O 20 FRN75VG10O 20 frome EE Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclose and the shipping destination aa 30 ore ENS FRN0 75 G10 20 HD FRN1 5VG10 20 20 1EC60269 4 FRN22VG10 20 30 1EC60269 4 FRN3 7 G10 20 40 1EC60269 4 2
188. l brake is used to stop or hold the motor for the sake of the product safety system of whole system do not use the inverter s control signals such as output from terminal Y Using control signals does not satisfy the safety standards because of software intervention Use safety relay units complying with EN ISO13849 1 PL d Cat 3 or higher to activate mechanical brakes The safety shutdown circuit between terminal EN1 and EN2 input sections and inverter s output shutdown section 1s dual configured redundant circuit so that an occurrence of a single fault does not detract the Safe Torque Off STO If a single fault is detected in the safety shutdown circuit the inverter coasts the motor to a stop even with the EN1 PS and EN2 PS states being ON as well as outputting an alarm to external equipment Note that the alarm output function is not guaranteed to all of single faults It is compliant with EN SO13849 1 PL d Cat 3 The Safe Torque Off STO function does not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically Before starting wiring or maintenance jobs be sure to disconnect the input power to the inverter For details refer to Wiring in the safety precautions given on page vi In the case of a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM a voltage is generated on the motor terminals even during coast to a stop caused by the Safe Torque Off STO function When handling the live parts therefore be sure to chec
189. lications Overload capability 120 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank or two ranks higher capacity of inverters SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output voltage output frequency range rated output capacity rated output current and overload capability SCCR Short circuit capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram for 30 kW or above SER No Product number 68A123A0579E BB 601 Production week This indicates the week number that is numbered from 1st week of January The 1st week of January is indicated as 01 Production year Last digit of year Product version C Compliance with European Standards See Chapter 8 Section 8 1 cus ust Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification See Chapter 8 Section 8 2 IG Compliance with the Radio Waves Act South Korea See Chapter 8 Section 8 3 Functional safety standards is supported on products other than AA AB product version If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Keypad RU Warning plate Front cover Main nameplate Front cover mounting screw SR STK Sub nameplate
190. lished 2 Multiplex system cansel response ala AJo ovl ta m D 3 Multiplex system master selected al D E 7 4 ues system local station failure Available soon 6 Alarm output for any alarm oala aja al al so O no O D a Q lt D 30 Q O 3 3 Cc O ie p O pu mn 5 x D e 7 Light alarm L ALM 8 Maintenance timer 9 Braking transistor broken DBAL 0 DC fan locked DCFL 61 li agreement 2 N AG2 63 Axial fan stopped MFAN 64 dea ready Available soon AS RDY 67 Answerback to cancellation of torque command torque current command H41 CCL H42 CCL 68 Answerback to cancellation of torque limiter mode 1 F40 CCL F40 AB Hi La oO 73 ON command PRT 73 72 Turn ON Y terminal test output Y ON 73 Turn OFF Y terminal test output x m Y I 75 cai clock battery lifetime expired 76 Magnetic position tuning in progress TUN MG Available soon 77 SPGT battery warning SPGT B ae soon 80 EN terminal detection circuit failure 81 EN terminal OFF 82 I N function in progress SF 4 STO under testing by safety function SF 0 to 84 Terminal Y 1 Function See 10 to 84 See Terminal Y1 Function Y1 Function 10 to 84 See Terminal Y 1 Function o NIN Se m U a 4 Zm o 00 AK 85 Drive control c 2 N amp D S Z Z 5 c 0 lt 0 D Z
191. lly adjusted value Replacing the motor or encoder requires adjustment of the magnetic pole position offset again Table 4 4 1 Configuration for Test Run of PMSM Function Name Current configuration before test run A E E SERE ER code Values given below are factory defaults amp F01 Speed The current 0 Enable the y and keys on Command N1 the keypad Digital speed F02 Operation setting Method configuration of function codes differs depending m upon the equipment DA Enable the and keys on the keypad to run or Make a note of the stop the motor F03 Maximum 1500 e LaS a 750 r min Set about half of the current value Speed M1 r min tuem change ecuacion before test run code data as shown at the F40 Torque Limiter 0 right 3 3 Torque current limit Mode 1 Disable F44 Torque Limiter 150 If motor power wires or encoder Level 1 wires are wrongly connected the motor may run out of control breaking the equipment To suppress abrupt acceleration at the time of runaway decrease the torque limiter level Speed 00 01 Speed disagreement alarm Enable id Disable Power supply phase loss detection Alarm Disable Note 1 Ifthe moment of inertia of the coupled equipment is large the motor may not run at a test run If it happens adjust the torque limiter level 1 properly specifications Note 2 After a test run revert the function code data to the previous values 68 3 Setting the magnetic pol
192. load Early Warning h Motor Overload Early Warning 1 h DB Overload Early Warning h DB Thermal Time Constant 1 Speed Detection Level 2 1 Speed Detection Level 3 1 1 010 84 Ses Terminal V11 Function Nas 0 to 84 Gr Terminal ia Funcion 1 104 Seo Terminal 1 Funcion n 26 vivos v viv Y Dh Terminal 14 Function 1 010 84 See Terminal Yt Function N 26 viy ss yiii Enjrembalivisicuncion 1 foto Ge0 Terminar ri Function n vv se vy 1 01084 Soe Terminal 1 Futon Tn as viv se Lv vv fy 0 to 84 0 to 84 0000 to 001F 0 Normal open 1 Normal close 0 to 10 50 to 200 C 1 50 to 200 C 0 00 to 5 00 V The PTC is activated if the input voltage of the PTC terminal exceeds this activation level ao the PTC thermistor is selected P30 A31 A131 25 to 100 0 to 100 E35 specifies ED of the braking resistor relative to the inverter capacity When E35 0 the overload protection function 5 7 is disabled 0 to 100 0 to 1000s No dividing 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 1 64 0 to 6 Internal PG input is divided before output Internal speed command Pulse oscillation mode PG PD Detected pulse input oscillation mode PG PR Pulse command input oscillation mode Integrated PG PG SD Detected speed pulse input oscillation mode 7 to 10 Input pulse is arbitrarily divided before output AB 90 phase difference signal Y Drive control gt EN 58
193. low USB port cover USB connector Connector for manufacturers Figure 2 4 1 Connecting a USB Cable Comnecting the inverter to a PC with a USB cable enables remote control from FRENIC VG Loader On the PC running FRENIC VG Loader it is possible to edit check and manage the inverter s function code data and monitor the real time data and the running alarm status of the inverter ACAUTION Connector located beneath the USB connector is provided for particular manufacturers Do not access it Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 44 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components The keypad allows you to start and stop the motor view various data including maintenance information and alarm information configure function codes monitor I O signal status copy data and calculate the load factor 7 segment LED monitor LCD monitor RUN key Program key forward Shift key RUN key reverse Reset key STOP key UP key HELP key Function Data key DOWN key For details refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 45 Table 3 1 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Five digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes E In Running mode Running status information e g detected speed speed command and torque command E In Programming mode Same as above E In
194. ly specified gt Increase the data of F07 C35 C46 C56 or C66 acceleration time gt Decrease the torque boost P35 A55 A155 and restart the inverter to check that the speed increases Measure the output current Reduce the load Check that increasing the torque boost P35 A55 A155 starts the motor gt Increase the value of the torque boost P35 A55 A155 Check that there is no noise on the control signal wires connecting to external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals Check whether the external speed command potentiometer is malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 9 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 through F45 is correctly configured and the TL2 TL1 terminal command Select torque limiter level 2 1 is correct gt Correct the data of F40 through F45 or reset them to the factory defaults Check whether the speed command potentiometer is malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter gt Set the TL2 TLI correctly gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 C35 C36 C46 C47 C56 C57 C66 C67 Check the terminal commands RTI and RT2 for
195. magnetic flux command is 6 25 0 00 to 1 00 times 0 005 to 1 000 s 0 001 to 50 000 kgem The magnification is switchable by H228 O oO EE N Default setting al o o o o Q o h o 0 000 to 10 000 s 0 0 to 150 0 r min 0 0 to 150 0 r min 0 to 150 0 r min 0 0 000 to 10 000 s 0 0 to 300 0 Y 0 000 to 10 000 s Y Oor 1 o Q Q o 50 000 o 0 Disable 1 Cause a mock alarm When H108 does not define a mock alarm as a light c alarm a heavy alarm 2 7 occurs when it defines a mock alarm as a light alarm a light alarm 4i _ occurs Holding down the and amp keys simultaneously for three seconds also causes a mock alarm 0 01 to 20 00 s H144 specifies the toggle data error detection time O to 3 0 Disable 1 Enable for FWD unipolar operation 2 Enable for REV unipolar operation 3 Enable for FWD REV bipolar operation 2 8 o oO Q 000 po ft kkil lt lt kkhk z z Y Y lt Ee A AA ee eee ELLE ee EE DE k lt 22 z z z ete ze z z z z z z z jz z 2 lt 3 Y Y lt p lt lt zjizjz z z lt lt lt lt lt vecwpPo z z z z z z z _ ZT tt z 8 gt 3 KP lt p lt p kkil I lt lt l lt lt k z z vecwoPo Z Ladi Kii YIN N 0 to 100 ms N Increase this setting if the speed fluctuation is large under vector control without speed sensor 0 0 to 20 0 0 0
196. malities and reactors when the inverter is running olfactory inspections Magnetic Check for chatters when the inverter is Auditory inspection No abnormalities contactors and running relays Main circu Additional notes 1 The inspection interval every year of check items given in Table 7 3 1 and Table 7 3 2 is merely a guide Make the interval shorter depending on the installation environment 2 Store and organize the inspection results to utilize them as a guide for operation and maintenance of the equipment and service life estimation 3 At the time of an inspection check the cumulative run times on the keypad to utilize them as a guide for replacement of parts Refer to Section 7 4 1 Judgment on service life 4 The inverter has cooling fans inside to ventilate itself for discharging the heat generated by the power converter section This will accumulate dust or dirt on the heat sink depending on the surrounding environment In a dusty environment the heat sink requires cleaning in a shorter interval than that specified in periodic inspection Neglecting cleaning of the heat sink can rise 1ts temperature activating protective circuits to lead to an abrupt shutdown or causing the temperature rise of the surrounding electronic devices to adversely affect their service life 3 Checking the functional safety circuit In applications where no regular activation of the Safe Torque Off STO function with terminals EN
197. mes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident AXCAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measures to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise It takes a maximum of 5 seconds to establish the input output of the control circuit after the main power is turned ON Take appropriate measures such as external timers An accident could occur Table 2 2 5 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise Table 2 2 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Power supply Power supply 10 VDC 10mA Max for an external speed command potentiometer for the Variable resistor 1 to 5kQ potentiometer The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected Analog setting 1 The speed is commanded according to the external voltage input voltage input e 0 to 10 VDC 0 to maximum speed 2 Hardware
198. minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Never modify the inverter Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries Disposal ACAUTION Treat this product as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur e The battery used in this product is a so called primary battery When disposing of it comply with local codes and regulations Speed control mode A CAUTION e If the control parameters of the automatic speed regulator ASR are not appropriately configured under speed control even turning the run command OFF may not decelerate the motor due to hunting caused by high gain setting Accordingly the inverter may not reach the stop conditions so that it may continue running Even if the inverter starts deceleration the detected speed deviates from the zero speed area before the zero spee
199. motor is separated from mechanical equipment 5 Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF Powering on the inverter with any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation 6 Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment e g a defense to prevent people from access to the equipment 7 Check that a power factor correction DC reactor DCR is connected to terminals P1 and P Inverters of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters of 75 kW or above are provided together with a DCR as standard Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter 8 Check that the PG pulse generator wiring is correct A CAUTION If the inverter is powered on with wrong wiring disconnect the PG signal wires from the inverter keep only the PG powered on via the PGP and PGM and then check that each signal is correctly output with an oscilloscope or recorder Wrong wiring may break the PG Inverter TH1 THC OO Jumper bar DCR not connected Inverter Note In principle the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground If the inverter is significantly affected by external induction noise however connection to 0V may be effective to suppress the influence of noise Figure 4 1 1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals Vector dedicated motor connected 55 4 2 Powering ON and Checking AWARNING e Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the
200. mpany s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business office or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed
201. n Restart Mode after Momentary Ma Failure Wait time Decrease rate in speed Continuous running level Run command self hold setting 5 0 1to5 0s 1 to 3600 r min s 0 to 4 0 Disable ASR autotuning Avaliable soon 2 Motor parameter auto tuning RT Lo 3 Autotuning with the motor stopped amp Autotuning with the motor running Upon completion of auto tuning the HO1 data automatically reverts to 0 To save the tuned data perform the Full save function HO2 Oor1 When tuning is executed at H01 and the internal data is written or when the data is written by way of the link system T Link field bus and RS 458 etc the data goes out when the power supply of the inverter is turned off This function must operate when preservation is necessary After writing the data this function s data code automatically returns to 0 Setting HO3 to 1 reverts the function code data modified by the customer to the factory defaults Initialization targets include all fields of F E C H 0 L and U codes except motor parameter fields P A and F04 F05 F10 to F12 F58 Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data automatically reverts to 0 0 01 to 20 00 s This control detects the temperature of the heat sink in the inverter unit and turns the cooling fan ON OFF automatically It is possible to output the FAN Cooling fan in operation signal in conjunction with this function Aut
202. n 4 3 3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor MH Adjusting the magnetic pole position Problem The DC link bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level Possible Causes 1 The power supply voltage exceeded the range of the inverter specification 2 A surge current entered the input power supply 3 The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia of the load 4 The acceleration time was too short 5 Braking load was too heavy 6 Malfunction caused by noise 7 The inverter output lines were short circuited 8 Wrong connection of the braking resistor 9 Large rapid decrease of the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within the specified range In the same power line if a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge momentary large increase in the voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia of the load and the deceleration time Increase the deceleration time F08 C36 C47 C57 C67 Consider the use of a braking resistor or PWM converter RHC C Decrease the moment of inertia of the load Enable the overvoltage trip prevention H57 Select the power limit function F40 2 Under vector control with speed sens
203. nal power supply power Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC Maximum 100 mA DC 2 This terminal also supplies a power to the load connected to the transistor output terminals Refer to Transistor output described later in this table for more CM Digital input Two common terminals for digital input signals common Electrically isolated from terminals 11 M and CMY Ti E Using a relay contact to turn FWD REV or X1 to X9 ON or OFF Figure 2 2 8 shows two examples of a circuit configuration that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 to X9 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch is turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it is turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW 5 a aS T 2 m lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt 24 VDC Al 24 VDC Photocoupler Photocoupler a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 2 8 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact 31 Digital input Analog output Table 2 2 5 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Name Functions Gip E Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn FWD REV or X1 to X9 ON or OFF Figure 2 2 9 shows two examples of a circuit configuration tha
204. ng Braking starting speed Braking level Braking time Depending upon the inverter s capacity 78 Remarks Function code F23 F24 F26 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 TI TI D gt A 00 N A F50 F51 Communica 2 Drive tions address D control 5 S 2ic o c D Zal S Name Dir Data setting range 2 8iX 3 IQ 485 Link 3 els Els No No S S s 2 Jjaj lo q lt O Z lt V x VC wo PG Vif 3 Ve tor PS 17h 5Ch Starting Speed 0 0 to 150 0 r min Limited in order not to lower to 0 1 Hz or below under vector control w o speed sensor and V f control Use F23 for assuring the torque at startup tokingtime o oowo0s oo v a vivio 1Ah 5Eh Motor Sound O 2 to 15 kHz N l8for55 Y Y 10 Y Y Y Y Carrier frequency 2 2kHz kW or 3 3 kHz below 4 4kHz 5 5 kHz 7 for 75 6 6 kHz kW or 7 7 kHz above 8 9 8 kHz 10 11 10 kHz 12 13 14 12 kHz 15 15 kHz This controls the carrier frequency to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself to suppress the resonance with the machinery and to decrease a leakage current from the output circuit wirings Oor 1 0 Excite relay 30 when an alarm occurs 1 Excite relay 30 when the inverter power is normally established 0 0 to 150 0 r min Limited in order not to lower to 0 1 Hz or below un
205. ng down operation using the last limited speed result Limit the winding down speed with the rated speed under specific conditions H228 201Ch h Load Inertia Magnification Setting O to 2 0 1 time 0 001 to 50 000 kgem 1 10 times 0 01 to 500 00 kg m 2 100 times 0 1 to 5000 0 kg m Switches the magnification of the load inertia H51 H52 H202 H205 H208 H211 H322 2116h Notch Filter 1 10 to 2000 Hz Resonance frequency H323 2117h Attenuation level 0 to 40 dB H325 2119h Notch Filter 2 1 110 to 2000 Hz Resonance frequency H326 211Ah Attenuation level 0 to 40 dB 5 3 6 A codes Alternative Motor Parameter Functions M2 M3 5 3 7 o codes Option Functions 5 3 8 L codes Lift Functions 5 3 9 SF codes Safety Functions For details of the above function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Function Codes Tables LU For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes 101 Default setting Drive control c 2 oat N amp i Vit kkl lt k k lt P VC for PSM 40 0 75 0 93 7 Y Y 193 Y Y lt Y 0 0 kl kkk lt p gt lt P XT vw a 8 amp Q EJES kkk lt e E E di di i ki 00 2 00 2 Remarks Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Protective Functions The FRENIC VG series of inverters has various protective functions as listed below to p
206. nger than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor M3 Maximum Speed properly LH For the motor parameter auto tuning procedure H01 2 refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 5 H Codes High performance Functions Function M2 Maximum Speed 5 00 s Tuning Selection 2 Auto tuning R1 Lo 0 Disable Note Performing motor parameter auto tuning H01 2 automatically changes the data of function codes P06 and P07 for M1 A08 and A09 for M2 and A108 and A109 for M3 Be careful with this data change After tuning be sure to perform the full save function H02 1 to save the tuned data into the inverter 60 E For motors except Fuji VG motor Configure the function codes as listed below and perform motor parameter auto tuning H01 3 or 4 For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes Function M1 Drive Control M2 Drive Control M3 Drive Control 37 Others ES PAD Seren No modification is required for M2 or M3 Motor oeapp ice M1 Thermistor Type 1 Vector control for IM 0 Vector control for IM without speed sensor with speed sensor M2 Thermistor Type 0 No thermistor 1 NTC thermistor
207. nnector configuration CN W white When using terminals R1 and T1 ae Wh t using terminal R1 or T1 i Use conditions SE ard A e Feeding the DC linked power e Combined with a PWM converter Cote By factory default the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W are set on the and positions respectively Do not exchange them unless you drive the inverter with a DC linked power supply Wrong configuration of these switching connectors cannot drive the cooling fans causing a heat sink overheat alarm Li or a charger circuit alarm FA 37 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches AWARNINGA Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for those of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches ar
208. nonnnnnnnnnanos 118 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified tiME occcccccnnnnnnnonononooonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnns 118 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure 119 ES The motorabnormally heats UD s ld alii 119 9 The motor does not run as E td a cid 120 10 When the motor accelerates or decelerates the speed is not stable ooooccccccnnnnnnonooononoconononononcnonaninnns 120 11 The motor stalls da O nO dd a dodo 120 12 When the T Link communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command A O ced Uae cen A A rel aL E ee el a aa AEO A AARE 121 13 When the SX bus communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command A enea EE a ee rT ea RE eRe E aa I E EE E EARR 121 14 When the CC Link communications option is in use neither a run command nor a speed command VAIS 5 SLC A Conceal es tuba 121 MESA Wisin O A 122 6 5 2 Problems with inverter Setting So 4 05520 0 lt ec5cciciancadeaecdosaadcccanehexsesisasWaeuvabsbeaeeeedicxaxs oeieeeese ae isiaiaid ieee 122 EJ Nothing appears onthe ole eds ada 122 2 The desired function code does not A ease ee eeeeee ene eee 122 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad oooooooooconcccnooooccnnnncnnnnoannnonononnnnnnonnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 123 4 Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link
209. ntrol Check that the control circuit terminal block is secured to the inverter circuit terminal block 2 Enable input circuit logic error Check the ON OFF timings of EN 1 and EN2 with Menu 4 I O CHECK gt Check that jumper bars are mounted between terminals EN1 and PS and between EN2 and PS Operate the relay so that the ON OFF timings of EN1 and EN2 are synchronized Check whether the relay s are not welded If welded replace the relay Check the gap between the ON OFF timings of EN1 and EN2 Keep the gap within 50 ms yy y 3 Enable input circuit fault Take the measures given in 2 above gt Ifthe error persists ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter Inform the representative of the alarm sub code displayed Alarm sub code 0002 0005 to 0008 Problem The printed circuit board s or CPU is faulty Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Inverter affected by strong Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct electrical noise grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires Implement noise control measures 2 Short circuit on the printed Check the printed circuit board s for short circuits accumulation of dust or dirt circuit board s gt Ask your Fuji Electric representative to repair the inverter Sub code 0001 to 0008 Inform the representative of the alarm sub code di
210. number of startups for performing maintenance of the machinery O to 65535 in units of 10 hours Specifies the maintenance interval for performing maintenance of the machinery 0 Disable 1 Write the current date and time Setting H88 to 1 sets up the calendar clock in accordance with the settings of H85 to H87 After that the H88 data automatically reverts to 0 0 Estimated value No display 1 PG detected value PG detected value 1 10 times 2 100 times Switches the magnification setting of ASR1 to ASR4 feedforward gain 0 Disable compatible with VG7 1 Enable compatible with VG5 0 to 5000 ms Specifies the time constant of the PID command filter after switched by H21 97 100 to 160 Change when running a S N Default setting Drive control c 2 5 N amp i Format type HS E HE ES ES ES ES ES E ff ES a O Ve win PG RAR RA A A gt a 5 3 pea 197 8760 143 N Y al 98 fila i A ES L a N Y D lt gt a Q 3 T Y Remarks Function code lt Ss E T T T T 7 7 T T T Z Oo o o o o o Oo Oo o O o TI m g O wW gt 00 A a gt 5 gt gt gt a gt a gt a a H103 H104 H105 H106 H107 H108 H109 H110 H111 H112 H113 H114 H115 H116 Communica tions address 485 Link No h 1FO3h Name Protective Maintenance Function Selection 1 1F04h h Protec
211. o 1 00 N 3 N ee Gain leis Coefficient En 2 h 0 00 Disable N 0 01 to 2000 A Specifies the allowable current value to prevent the permanent magnet of a PMSM from getting demagnetized If the current exceeding this setting ru ni Toru Cores Gant 7 Jooow eae vio line mi Torque Correction Gain2 1 ooo 1000S dN INN nt Torque Gorecton Gein EN TIT In n M1 Torque Correction Gain 4 1 000 7 000 SY NINN INV n Mt Torque Correction Gain 1 500010500 SS VN NINN n m1 Torque Correction Gain 6 1 5000195000 O VN INN 1 wie h M1 Magnetic Flux Limiting Value 1 150 0 to 150 0 ERA a N 1 N flows an overcurrent alarm 41 occurs 1 h M1 Torque Correction Gain 7 Pale 1 000 to 1 000 ly yin 8 n N N v lt lt lt 333h Depending upon the inverter s capacity 93 Remarks 5 3 5 H codes High Performance Functions Function code H02 HO3 H04 HO5 HO6 HO8 HO9 H10 H11 H13 H14 H15 H16 oe tions a 403h 404h oe Name Dir 485 Link No No H01 401h i 402h Full Save Function Data Initialization Auto reset Times 405h HjAuto reset Auto reset Reset interval Auto reset Reset interval E E Oo Oo 00 O I I 409h 40Bh 40D E S o gt S O m 410h h h C2h C3h h Ma Cooling Fan ON OFF Control Rev Phase Sequence Lock Starting Mode Auto search Energy saving Operation Automatic Operation OFF Functio
212. o 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep speeds 1 to 15 can be switched by turning terminal commands SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 ON OFF Multistep Speed 2 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 3 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 4 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 5 1 10 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 6 1 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 7 1 10 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 8 1 10 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 Y 0 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y Y 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 0 0 Multistep Speed 9 Multistep Speed 10 Multistep Speed 11 lt lt lt ER E RERE E E Multistep Speed 12 lt Multistep Speed 13 Multistep Speed 14 Creeping Speed 1 lt 0 to 30000 r min 0 00 to 100 00 0 0 to 999 9 m min Switchable by C21 C18 and C19 apply also to the creep speed under
213. o search detects the idling motor speed at starting and drives the motor at the same speed without Decelerate to stop when FWD CM or REV CM is The inverter is turned off below the stop speed Coast to stop when FWD CM or REV CM is Decelerate to stop using ASR when FWD CM or Coast to stop when FWD CM or REV CM is Drive control lt 2 w Data setting range N amp E D S Z Z 5 c 0 lt 0 D q E O Zz a a SOMA a ee a ce a N Y Y Y Y Y Y NIN Y ee e OOo AA RARA O S mer AAA AS ga d Joso lt o ox azk lt vw pK ja fal lt VC for Pv Y Y ri E AUNAR MN N Y opened even for ON between FWD CM and REV CM opened REV CM is opened under torque control opened under torque control gt a f N 2 Default setting rn AA A A AAA Data copying 3 phase 200 V 200 to 300 V Y 235 Y Y YIYIYIY 3 phase 400 V 400 to 600 V 470 This setting applies when F14 2 Trip after recovery from power failure or F14 3 Continue to run 1 N 1 YIY 94 YIY YIY 0 Setting made by H17 Maximum time The inverter self holds the run command while the control power supply in the inverter is established or until the DC link bus voltage comes to almost 0 94 Remarks Communica tions address Name Data setting range he Link c 2 oat N amp i Function code E o NN o PAER gt Change when running
214. ocedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed ote In tables given in this manual inverter types are denoted as FRN__ VG1H0 20 40 2 2 2 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide ACAUTION Be sure to disconnect the USB cable from the USB connector before removing the front cover Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 1 For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below First loosen the front cover fixing screw hold the cover with both hands slide it downward tilt it toward you and then pull 1t upward as shown below While pressing the wiring guide upward pull it out toward you After carrying out wiring put the wiring guide and the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal a Wa AD y a N e e T E e TES f Pye A F y AI y a m y Ar A J 3 ES n q hy Front cover fixing screw Front cover Wiring guide wiring guide upward pull it out toward you Figure 2 2 1 Removing the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide FRN11VG1H0 20 2 For inverters with a capacity of 30 to 630 kW Loosen the four front cover fixing screws hold the cover with both hands slide it upward slightly and pull it toward you as shown below After carrying out wiring align the screw holes provided in the front cover with the screws on the inverter case then put the front cover back into place in the reverse order of remov
215. odic Inspection 1 Periodic inspection 1 Before the inverter is powered ON or after it stops running Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7 3 1 Before performing periodic inspection 1 shut down the power and then remove the front cover Even if the power has been shut down it takes the time for the DC link bus capacitor to discharge After the charging lamp is turned OFF therefore make sure that the DC link bus voltage has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below using a multimeter or a similar instrument Table 7 3 1 Periodic Inspection List 1 Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Structure such as Check for frame and cover Main circuit Control circuit Cooling system Conductors and wires 1 Loose bolts at clamp sections 2 Deformation and breakage 3 Discoloration caused by overheat 4 Contamination and accumulation of dust or dirt 1 Check that bolts and screws are tight and not missing 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation cracks breakage and discoloration caused by overheat or deterioration 3 Check for contamination or accumulation of dust or dirt 1 Check conductors for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the wires for cracks and discoloration 1 Retighten 2 3 4 Visual inspection 1 Retighten 2 3 Visual inspection 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4
216. on codes E01 through E09 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O CHECK using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the function code data gt Press the key after changing the function code data gt Check that STORING is displayed on the LCD monitor Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON Turn OFF both FWD and REV 4 Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running The data of the function codes is protected The WE LK terminal command Enable data change via communications link is not entered though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal The Full save function H02 was not executed The data of function code F02 cannot be changed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 OPR MNTR using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor and then change the data of the function codes Check the data of function code F00 Data Protection gt Change the data of F00 from Enable data protection F00 1 to Disable data protection
217. onononnnnnonononannnnnnoconnnnnnonocccnnnanonoss 7 5 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD earth leakage crema dd aa OE raa tease OSEE E 8 6 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input primary circuit oocccnooococcncnnnooonnnnnnonnnanonononnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnss 10 7 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter output secondary ClrCUlb ooooooooocoooccnnnncnnnnnnnononononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 10 ES Surgeabsrbers rs killer rnani aE EAS teas ee ectic cous sececee tata EARN A Eaa 10 A A 11 L3 lc A O 11 1 3 6 Precautions in driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM cccesssecccceeseeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 11 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER o00oooooccccoooccccnoonnncnoononononnnonononnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnannnnss 12 Zit A vis souaucninsancdcaseepssecssneatuanaseesiaspanyounududesaseiddddddeaaesmiadsnnte under sagossupiswumiaees 12 22 NW O NA 14 Dal COMMCCU OM dara aia llanas 14 2 2 2 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide ccooooococnncnnnnoooonnnnnnnononcnnnoconononnnnnnonccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 16 22 37 PNW ALIN precautions NO 17 A A precautions sone a o II A 19 2 2 9 E RA 21 1 Screw specifications and recommended wire IZ dro toc 21 t2 MAI ECU termmalS A A EA ii 23 3 Detailed functions OF main circuit SUIS A da att 25 2 2 6 Control circuit terminals common to all inverter types o
218. ontain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm2 or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1 000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa Vibration 55 kW or below 200 V class series 75 kW or above 200 V class series 75 kW or below 400 V class series 90 kW or above 400 V class series 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s2 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s2 9 to less than 55 Hz 2 m s2 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz 1 m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any clearance between them 22 kW or below the surrounding temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink of the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in a dustproof panel of your system Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 1 2 Table 1 3 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Altitude Output current derating factor 1000 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 Fuji Electric strongly recommends in
219. ontinue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication L 4 on the LED monitor In addition to the indication 4 the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the light alarm signal L ALM to a general purpose digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E15 through E19 to 57 Function codes H106 through H110 specify which alarms should be categorized as light alarm The available light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 3 1 For the light alarm factors and the alarm removal procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 5 Monitoring light alarms Note that light alarms SnF that could occur in the functional safety card OPC VG1 SAFE cannot be selected by function codes H106 through H110 For details about SnF refer to the Functional Safety Card instruction manual 6 5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication 4_ Appears on the LED Monitor 6 5 1 Abnormal motor operation 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 No power supplied to the inverter No run forward reverse command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation A run command with higher priority than t
220. ontrol Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 2 5 and Figure 2 2 15 be sure to ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 or M When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal the external device may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 2 5 and Figure 2 2 15 Shielded Wire lt Control Circuit gt External Analog Capacitor lt Control Circuit gt Output Device 0 022 uF 50V 12 11 Potentiometer yay ane ae Ferri 1kto5kQ errite Core Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 2 5 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure
221. oooococcccccnononnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnn ono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 28 1 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes 00 a 28 21 Arrangementof terminals oresar E R O pbousaensuiamaawuniiadassaddes 28 3 Detailed functions of control circuit terminals viii dd A dit Sass 29 4 Wiring for control circuit terminals for inverters of 75 kW 200 V class series and those of 132 030 KW 400 Viclass Series A da 35 Deed SWitehine Connectors sise aston eae ee acces oe aaa hte anna th anna sads AAA aere aa AREAS EED DE Eaa EEA 36 22 8 Setine UNE SITS SWC NSS iiei Ne Ny a tte a Dela ane 38 2 3 Mounting and Connecting a Key A A Ati 40 2 3 Parts T guired for CONNECT loa 40 Z2 Mounn PO a N a E E 40 A ea aa eeaeee neaAAAAe is Soa aaencneetuiiudenascesssesndnsnia tail Seehieceed 44 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE REY PAD ia 45 3 1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components teoria 45 J2 Profr MMN e O dd 48 3 2 1 Setting the calendar clock Menu 12 DATE TIME IO oa 50 Chapter 4 TEST RUN PROCEDURE lt a A NEEE Oo iaa E AA EEA EENS 54 All Checkins Prior to POW CUI ON aies SS ts 55 AZ Powering ON and Checking rocoso EA T AE AES 56 4 2 1 Checking the input state of PG pulse generator signalS oooooocononcoocccnncnonooononnnnonononnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnannnnnnncnnnns S6 4 2 2 Mounting direction of a PG pulse generator and PG signalsS oooonoooccccnnnonoooconnnononnnnnnnononononnnnononnconnnannnnnncnnnns 57 4 3 Selecting a Desi
222. or Enable the torque limiter F40 to F45 Check if an overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 C35 C46 C56 C66 gt Select the S curve acceleration deceleration F67 to F70 gt Consider the use of a braking resistor or PWM converter RHC C Decrease the moment of inertia of the load yyy yyy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Consider the use of a braking resistor or PWM converter RHC C Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the overvoltage alarm occurred Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Appendix A Enable the auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V and W and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring Check if the resistance is too low Remove the short circuited part including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Check the connection Correct the connection Check whether the inverter runs at the time of rapid decrease of the load gt Consider the use of a braking resistor or PWM converter RHC C 113 6 4 If the Light Alarm Indication _ Appears on the LED Monitor If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can c
223. or M2 or M3 Oo beappled 010 M1 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor 0 0 to 359 9 Offset 0 0 to 359 9 CCW A60 M2 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor Use the function code to adjust the magnetic Offset pole position A160 M3 Magnetic Pole Position Sensor For detail refer to pages 69 3 Setting Offset the magnetic pole position sensor offset value oll M1 Saliency Ratio Xq Xd 1 000 to 3 000 5 5 0 0 A6l M2 Saliency Ratio Xq Xd Specify the sallenoy tanio Of PMSM 1 000 Al6l M3 Saliency Ratio Xq Xd F03 M1 Maximum Speed A06 M2 Maximum Speed Machinery design values 1500 r min A106 M3 Maximum Speed Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than Note specified time is short the inverter may not ion ti run the motor properly 08 Deceleration time 1 properly 500s Note For detail on function code that need to be configured other than the above refer to Table 4 3 1 Function code table 1 of Synchronous motor GNF2 and Table 4 3 2 Function code table 2 of Synchronous motor GNF2 F Note Since vector control for a Fuji GNF2 motor with speed sensor uses motor parameters the following conditions should be satisfied otherwise full control performance may not be obtained f A single motor should be connected per inverter Motor parameters are properly configured 62 WLOGZAND VL81 4N9D VL9I24ND VS9IZIND m V6 1Z3IND WLELZANO DODDOcoOcoaco oooO
224. or compliance to Functional Safety Standard 1 2 3 Wiring for terminals EN1 Enable input 1 and EN2 Enable input 2 EN1 EN2 and PS are terminals prepared for connection of safety related wires therefore careful wiring should be performed to ensure that no short circuit s can occur to these terminals Stopping the current flowing through terminal EN1 or EN2 activates the safety stop function For opening and closing the hardware circuit between terminals EN1 EN2 and PS use safety approved components such as safety relays that comply with EN ISO13849 1 PL d Cat 3 or higher to ensure a complete shutoff It is the responsibility of the machinery manufacturer to guarantee that a short circuiting or other fault does not occur in wiring of external safety components between terminals EN1 EN2 and PS Fault examples Terminals EN1 EN2 and PS are short circuited due to the wiring being caught in the door of the panel so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN1 EN2 although the safety component is OFF and therefore the safety function may NOT operate The wiring is in contact with any other wire so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN 1 EN2 and therefore the safety function may NOT operate To activate the STO function correctly be sure to keep terminals EN1 and EN2 OFF for at least 50 ms When inputting test pulses sent from the safety PLC to terminals EN1 and EN2
225. ort system or other purposes directly related to the human safety e Though the FRENIC VG is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation AWARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur e Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire e Inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above whose protective structure is IPOO involve a possibility that a human body may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block Inverters to which an optional DC reactor is connected also involve the same Install such inverters in an inaccessible place Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur A CAUTION e Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries e Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink e When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or an accident might result e Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Wiring
226. own below Recommended tightening torque 0 7 Nem RJ 45 connector Panel M3 x 12 To be provided by the customer Figure 2 3 7 Mounting the Keypad 3 Using a remote operation extension cable or a LAN cable interconnect the keypad and the inverter insert one end of the cable into the RS 485 port with RJ 45 connector on the keypad and the other end into that on the inverter See Figure 2 3 8 RJ 45 connector modular jack Remote operation Panel extension cable E CB 5S CB 3S CB 18 or LAN cable Keypad RJ 45 connector To the RS 485 communications port 1 exclusive to the keypad Figure 2 3 8 Connecting the Keypad to the Inverter with Remote Operation Extension Cable or an Off the shelf LAN Cable AXCAUTION e The RJ 45 connector on the inverter is exclusive to communication via a touch panel With the RJ 45 connector neithe RS 485 communication nor connection with FRENIC VG Loader is possible e Do not connect the inverter to a LAN port of a computer Ethernet hub or telephone line Doing so may damage the inverter or devices connected A fire or accident could occur m Using the keypad remotely in hand Follow step 3 of Mounting the keypad on the panel above 43 2 4 USB Connectivity At the right side of the keypad mounting place a USB port mini B connector is provided To connect a USB cable open the USB port cover as shown be
227. phase motor Read through this instruction manual to become familiar with proper handling and correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor The related documents are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use Table of Contents PM o ds dls 1 Mate ada v Chapter k BEFORE USE ee EER l 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Nameplates and type Of INVETteT oooocccccccnnnnnnnonoooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnns i 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks EEE AAA AA 3 LS Precautions for Usine Mye ers ai EEEE ed 4 13 1 Istallat on crono aT 4 T32 Storage A aN ie 6 UI Iemporary Storage AN O A O RI clu uaunsbonausbbiant sina a a a ae aAA 6 Prey UE eee TAI SU LR attetnsere 6 1 3 3 Precautions for connection of peripheral equipMeNt ooocccccccnnnnonnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 7 1 Phase advancing capacitors for power factor COITECH1ION cocccnnoncconnncnonononnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnannnnss 7 2 Power supply lines Application of a DC AC reactor ccecccccccccccscsscsscssccscsscsscsssssesssssessscssssscsscssessesssssesseseess 7 3 DC reactor DCR for correcting the inverter input power factor for suppressing harmonics 0000 7 4 PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factOT oooooccccnooooocnnnn
228. phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 20 2 2 5 Main circuit terminals 1 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes The tables and figures given below show the screw specifications and wire sizes Note that the terminal arrangements differ depending on the inverter types In each of the figures two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Use crimp terminals covered with an insulation sheath or with an insulation tube The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using a single HIV wire JIS C3317 for 75 C at a surrounding temperature of 50 C Table 2 2 1 Screw Specifications Inverter type Screw specifications Auxiliary control Auxiliary fan Main circuit power input power input Refert terminals Grounding ral terminals terminals RO TO R1 T1 Three phase Three phase Section 200 V 400 V 2 3 3 Screw Screw size Tightening size Tightening TAN Tightening IA Screw torque Screw torque torque driver N m driver Nm N m size size FRN0 75VG10 20 FRN0 75VG10 40 FRN1 5VG10 20 FRN1 5VG10 40 FRN2 2VG10 20 FRN2 2VG10 40 Figure A FRN3 7VG10 20 FRN3 7VG10 40 FR
229. pherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 8 1 1 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the motor and panel Zero Metal panel or phase p Power RCD reactors supply FRENIC VG compliant filter Three optional phase Shielded cable With overcurrent protection Two zero phase reactors ACL 74B Number of pass throughs 2 are essential when an EMC filter EFL 22SP 2 is used Figure 8 1 1 Mounting an EMC compliant Filter option in a Metal Panel 140 8 1 2 Harmonic component regulation in the EU When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it 1s regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 8 1 2 below for details Medium Voltage Medium to low voltage transformer Public low voltage power supply Medium to low voltage transformer Industrial low voltage Inverter Inverter power supply 1 kW or 1 kW or below below _ The inverter connected here is The inverter connected subject to harmonics here is not subject to the regulations If the harmonics harmonics re
230. put o 7 facade exceeds the Demagnetizing overcurrent level of the inverter 0100 Umit current tor PMSM This function is activated if the temperature 0001 to Protection by Heat sink surrounding the heat sink that cools down 0008 thermistor overheat the rectifier diodes and the IGBTs increases 0010 to due to stopped cooling fans 0200 For manufacturers This function is activated by digital input signal THR Enable external alarm trip Connecting an alarm contact of external equipment such as a braking unit or braking resistor to the control circuit terminal to which the THR is assigned activates this function according to the contact signal status This function is activated if the temperature 0001 to Protection by Inverter A ne ee termal surrounding the control printed circuit board 0008 thermistor verheal increases due to poor ventilation inside the E30 H106 This function is activated if the temperature detected by the NTC thermistor integrated in a dedicated motor for motor temperature F11 H106 A33 H106 A133 H106 External Protection by THR 514 alarm m Motor 7 pe rheat ES detection exceeds the motor overheat protection level E30 This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection if the motor 1 current inverter output current exceeds the operation level specified by Function code F11 This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload prote
231. r ACAUTION When storing the battery keep it away from direct sunlight high temperature high humidity and rainwater The battery used in this product is a so called primary battery When disposing of it comply with local codes and regulations 130 2 Loading the battery ACAUTION Before proceeding to the loading procedure be sure to shut down the power Fire or an accident could occur For the calendar clock setting refer to Section 3 2 1 Setting the calendar clock 1 Battery loading procedure for inverters of 22 kW or below 1 Remove the front cover 2 Load the battery to the location shown below 3 Fully insert the battery connector into the connector CN7 on the control printed circuit board CN7 o E E IS E e ei o Y LIA la Es MOTOR j E es 0 Figure 7 4 2 Battery Loaded 22 kW or below 131 2 Battery loading procedure for inverters of 30 kW or above 2 Remove the keypad 1 Remove the front cover Open the keypad and disconnect it from connectors CNS and CNS on the control printed circuit board TIRITAS Y y a NIGER SEN Ko Ee 4 Fully insert the battery connector into the connector
232. r LVL Paper manufacturing sewage disposal sludge treatment tire manufacturing gypsum manufacturing metal processing and a particular process in textile factories Wiredrawing machines metal processing extruding machines printing presses combustors and industrial waste treatment Textile manufacturing and paper manufacturing Outdoor installation Film manufacturing line pumps and food processing Installation of an inverter panel on a carrier or self propelled machine Ventilating fan at a construction site or a press machine Exporting 1 3 2 Storage environment The storage environment in which the inverter should be stored after purchase differs from the installation environment Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below 1 Temporary storage Table 1 3 3 Storage and Transport Environments Item Specifications Storage temperature 25 to 70 C Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or Relative humidity 5 to 95 2 id OEM 2Ne Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa during storage 70 to 106 kPa during transportation 1 Assuming comparatively short time storage e g during transportation or the like 2 Ev
233. r 1 M3 Need to be adjusted H181 M3 Draw current command H182 M3 Draw frequency 4 Alarm PG wire break occurs 1t 1s possible that the connection of the PG is incorrect gt gt Check the wiring of the PG AWARNING e The motor rotates when you start the auto tuning Check that it is not dangerous enough even when the motor is rotating An accident or injuries could occur 71 3 Case where the manually adjust magnetic pole position offset value If unable to tune the magnetic pole position offset can be adjusted manually according to the following method is possible In addition the method of this adjustment check the current magnetic pole position offset value is possible Configure the following parameters beforehand E69 Terminal Aol Function 26 U phase voltage E70 Terminal Ao2 Function 39 Magnetic pole position signal SMP E84 Aol 5 Filter Setting 0 000 s Cancel filter Rotate the motor shaft by hand to check that the positional relationship between the waveforms on Aol and Ao2 is as shown below If the waveforms are greatly misaligned adjust the data of function code 010 to align the waveforms as shown below Rotating in the forward direction Rotating in the reverse direction Ao1 Ao1 Induced Induced voltage l voltage Ao2 Ao2 Magnetic Magnetic pole position pole position When the 010 data is increased When the 010 data is decreased When the 010 data is decreased
234. r 6 TROUBLESHOOTING eoe bd 102 Gl APTO ECU VE Functions a A A TER A A Aa A AE E A E A EAS 102 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting rsraidaccia ld dicas ricino 103 6 3 Ifan alarm code appears on the LED monitor cooonnnnoouooonooonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnanannnnnss 104 a Cistof alarm ao 104 6 3 2 Possible causes of alarms checks and MAA ieee oe 110 TI Aa A T ttle 110 pT a TOVERCUIT SL a easel ab ie NNN reheat ae as sateen cate MIR alas d Sete aca a eseccs uacgndah 110 CANT lA IA 111 PS 112 EA A In O O Deere he 112 PAE A AE 113 6 4 If the Light Alarm Indication 1 A Appears on the LED MonNitOT oococincononinnonononananononononnnononon on ono no ninn cronos 114 6 5 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication L Appears on the LED Monitor oociccnincciciccninicncns 114 Gal ADnormal MOI e slo 114 ETA The motor dOes NOTO Aa AAA AAA AA heed A 114 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not Change occccccccccnnnnnnonooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 116 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the COMIMANd ccccccnnnnnnnooooonononnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 117 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed 117 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates coccccccccnnnnnonoononononnnono
235. r V f control Available soon ASR Feedforward Gain Magnification Setting Available soon UP DOWN S curve Pattern Available soon PID Command Filter Time Constant Magnetic Pole Position Offset Writing Permission Available soon 1 0000 to FFFF Upper two digits Minute Lower two digits Second Data setting range Oor 1 0 Normal phase U V W 1 Reverse phase U W V Using this function allows the motor to run with the phase sequence of the motor wires arbitrarily Enable this function to enable the AC power monitor Disable this function when DC power is supplied e g connecting with a power regenerative converter 0 to 600 s Specifies the condition of the cooling fan ON OFF Disable M1 number of startups M2 number of startups M3 number of startups M1 cumulative run time M2 cumulative run time M3 cumulative run time Initializes the number of startups and cumulative run time O to 65535 in units of 10 hours Initializes the cumulative run time when the cooling fan is replaced Usually write 0 after replacement 0 to 32767 When the capacitance measurement is user mode H104 setting this function code at 0 and shutting down the inverter power starts measuring the initial value of the capacitance and sets the measurement result to this function code 0 to 65535 in units of 10 hours Initializes the elapsed time of the DC link bus capacitor 0 to 65535 Specifies the
236. re of the braking resistor and stops the inverter output if the temperature exceeds the allowable value It is necessary to configure Function codes E35 to E37 depending on the resistor integrated or externally mounted If a fuse in the main DC circuit blows due to a short circuit in the IGBT circuit this protective function displays the error to prevent the secondary damage The inverter could be broken so immediately contact your Fuji Electric representative For models of 75 kW or above in 200 V class series and 90 kW or above in 400 V class series This function is activated if the DC fan is stopped For models of 45 kW or above in 200 V class series and 75 kW or above in 400 V class series This function is activated when the positioning deviation between the command and the detected values exceeds the setting of Function code 018 Excessive deviation value in synchronous operation Mounting an option makes the option codes o effective and displays them on the keypad This function is activated if a PG communication error occurs when the 17 bit high resolution ABS interface OPC VG1 SPGT is used 0001 to 2000 0001 0002 0005 to 0008 Input mismatch between terminals EN1 and EN2 Printed board failure This function detects a functional safety circuit fault and stops the inverter The alarm cannot be removed by the inverter s reset function circuit 104 Related function R
237. red Motor Drive COITO A A heat in Re 58 4 3 1 Vector control for IM with speed A add do 58 4 3 2 Vector control for IM without speed sensor dida 60 4 3 3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position SENSOT oooooooccccnncccccnanananonaannnonnnnnnnss 62 At A A A A 65 4 4 Running the Inverter for Operation Check coccccccccnnnnnnonononnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnono nono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nro nn nnnnnnnnnnnnos 67 4 4 1 Test Run Procedure for Induction Motor IN dde 67 4 4 2 Test Run Procedure for Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor PMSM seeessssssssessesssssseeesssssseresssssrerressssse 68 CL Betoreproceedine With tes TUN ii dd A KEE RE 68 PA coa AA E EE A a aa E oaar eben 68 3 Setting the magnetic pole position sensor offset value us a dad A A AA tt 69 1 Case where the magnetic pole position offset value is indicated on the label that came with the motor 69 2 Case where the automatically adjust magnetic pole position offset Value oooonoocccnnnnnnooooccnnnonnnaannnonononos 70 3 Case where the manually adjust magnetic pole position offset value ooccccccnnnnnnonoooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 72 EA AAA A nn O 73 4 Troubleshooting for motor abnormality ita do den DDoooDDrS odds 73 4 5 Selecting a Speed Command Source sseeesssssseeseeesssssseeeessssrrresssssrrreesssssretesssserttssssssttteessssssreesssssrreressssssrreeesssssrets 74 4 5 1 Setting up a
238. requency FWD Lower limit frequency REV Primary frequency estimation filter Uncontrolled Machine Driving Detection Speed Setting M1 Initial Magnetic Pole Position Detection Mode Available soon h M1 Pull in Reference Current Available soon h M1 Pull in Frequency Available soon M1 Reference Current for Polarity Discrimination Available soon M1 Alternate Voltage Available soon M2 Initial Magnetic Pole Position Detection Mode Available soon M2 Pull in Reference Current Available soon M2 Pull in Frequency Available soon M2 Reference Current for Polarity Discrimination Available soon M2 Alternate Voltage Available soon M3 Initial Magnetic Pole Position Detection Method Available soon M3 compensation gain M3 integral time M3 load inertia h Speed Decrease Detection Delay Timer Speed Command Detection Level FWD REV Speed Decrease Detection Level h Speed Command Detection Delay Timer Detection level Detection timer Dir 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Drive control O f w Data setting range N amp E Vit lt lt lt lt lt p lt lt zje KK zjz jz z z lt lt lt VC for PMSM Change when running 0 0 to 100 0 Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic flux command is 12 5 0 0 to 100 0 Compensation factor for exciting current when the
239. responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives E List of EMC compliant filters To satisfy the requirements noted above use inverters in combination with an external filter option dedicated to Fuji inverters In either case mount inverters in accordance with the installation procedure given below To ensure the compliance it is recommended that inverters be mounted in a metal panel Power supply Inverter type Filter type Remarks FENT Svona AD FRN11VG1020 In addition to a filter option two zero phase FRN22VG10 20 HD EFL 22SP 2 reactors ACL 74B Number of pass throughs 2 are required at the power supply side See Figure Three phase 8 1 1 200V HD F 5536 180 40 FRN30VG10 20 HD FRN37V G10 20 FS5536 250 99 1 HD FRN45VG10 20 Es HD FRN55VG10 20 o FS5536 400 99 1 FRN75VG10 20 HD FRN90VG10 20 HD FN3359 600 99 Note A box O replaces an alphabetic letter depending on the enclosure or the shipping destination Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 138 Power supply FRN3 7 G10 40 FRNS 5VG10 40 FRN7 5VG10 40 e FRN11VG10 40 a FRN15VG10 40 FRN18 5 G10 40 E FRN22VG10 40 HD FRN30VG10 40 HD FRN37V G10 40 ECR FRN45VG10 40 FRN55VG10 40 HD FRN75VG10 40
240. revent the system from going down and reduce system downtime The protective functions marked with an asterisk in the table are disabled by default Enable them according to your needs The protective functions include for example the heavy alarm detection function which upon detection of an abnormal state displays the alarm code and causes the inverter to trip the light alarm detection function which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current operation and other warning signal output functions If any problem arises understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in Section 6 2 and onwards for troubleshooting This function detects an abnormal state displays the corresponding alarm code and causes the inverter to trip The heavy alarm codes are check marked in the Heavy alarm object column in Table 6 3 1 For details of each alarm code see the corresponding item in Heavy alarm detection the troubleshooting The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes see Section 3 4 9 and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm information see Section 3 4 8 It can also display them This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a light alarm displays 1 HiL and lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping It is possible to define which abnormal states should be categorized as a light alarm Light alarm detection using f
241. rol Load adaptive control parameter switching Available soon Load inertia for winding up 1 Available soon Safety coefficient for winding up 1 Available soon Mechanical efficiency for winding up 1 Available soon Load inertia for winding up 2 Available soon N N N N o Oo Oo Oo Oo O o Oo al A oO N y F a F N o Q O ej y Safety coefficient for winding up 2 Available soon Mechanical efficiency for winding up 2 Available soon Load inertia for winding down 1 Available soon Safety coefficient for winding down 1 Available soon Mechanical efficiency for winding down 1 Available soon Load inertia for winding down 2 Available soon Safety coefficient for winding down 2 Available soon Mechanical efficiency for winding down 2 Available soon Multi limit speed pattern function Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at max speed Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1 1 Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1 2 Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1 4 Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1 6 Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed x 1 8 Available soon Multi limit speed pattern at rated speed x 2 0 Available soon N N N N N
242. rovided by the customer Note 1 When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 1 OBASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant with US ANSI TIA EIJA 568A Category 5 20 m or less Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer Sanwa Supply Inc Model KB 10T5 01K 1 m KB STP 01K 1 m Shielded LAN cable to make the inverter compliant with the EMC Directive Note 2 When mounting on a panel wall use the screws with a length suitable for the wall thickness 2 3 2 Mounting procedure You can install and or use the keypad in one of the following three ways E Mounting it directly on the inverter see Figure 2 3 1 a b E Mounting it on the panel see Figure 2 3 2 E Using it remotely in your hand see Figure 2 3 3 Keypad Keypad a FRN15VG10 20 b FRN37VG10 20 Figure 2 3 1 Mounting the Keypad Directly on the Inverter Panel Keypad rear FAN NV ee ISR E N N N S N Wy y A 3 N N NANTES A NY y UNS Remote operation Inverter extension cable Inverter Remote operation Keypad extension cable fixing screws Figure 2 3 2 Mounting the Keypad on the Panel Figure 2 3 3 Using the Keypad Remotely in Your Hand 40 After completion of wiring mount the keypad using the following procedure Make sure that the inverter power is shut down beforehand E Mounting the keypad directly on the inverter 1 Remove the keypad by pulling it toward you with
243. rque boost specified The specified acceleration deceleration time was too short Overload Ventilation paths are blocked Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the service life expired or failure The wires to the motor are too long causing a large leakage current from them What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted Check whether decreasing the torque boost P35 A55 A155 does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the torque boost P35 A55 A155 Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 C35 C46 C56 C66 Measure the load factor to see that it does not exceed 100 Refer to Section 3 4 7 Measuring load factor Menu 6 LOAD FCTR gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E33 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated gt Decrease the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance For details refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 2 Installing the Inverter Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink For the clean
244. rque command TN MANN Pp 1 fotoso m Cd CY OEA aA Y Y 230 Y Y N N Cause pre excitation at the time of startup Pre excitation continues for the duration specified by F74 Cause pre excitation at the time of startup and stop Pre excitation continues for the duration specified by F74 or until the magnetic flux command reaches the detection level specified by E48 whichever is earlier Drive control Cc 2 f w Data setting range N amp E Vif Change when running Running status rotational direction and operation guide Bar charts for detected speed 1 current and reference torque D gt a Q 3 w QO Y ARA AA ae E a INEA T AA ITT RR lt AR R rr Y a E E 0 000 4 Y Y Pre excitation Speed Limiter Motor Selection Duration 1 0 0 to 10 0s N Y Y 2 YIYININ Turning a run command FWD REV ON automatically continues pre excitation for the duration o by F74 N YY 91 YIYIYIY Level 1 for forward rotation Level 2 for reverse rotation Level 1 for both forward and reverse rotations Level 1 for upper limit Level 2 for lower limit Level 1 for forward rotation Level 2 for reverse rotation Terminal 12 input added as a bias tean IA v ooe A teaa 1 1100 01100 v poore iii M1 M2 M3 0 1 2 0 to2 N YIN 54 Y Y Y Y Select M1 Note that switching of contacts by X terminal functions has priority over th
245. rtainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 7 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products included in this documentation Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchased products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Free of charge warranty period and warranty range 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The product warranty period is 1 year from the date of purchase or 18 months from the manufacturing week imprinted on the name place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furt
246. rter into the Safe Torque Off STO state Figure 8 4 3 Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned OFF with the Inverter being Stopped shows the timing scheme to apply when the emergency stop button is turned OFF with the inverter being stopped Input to the EN1 and EN2 comes ON making the inverter ready to run Run command Stop Run Stop Emergency stop ON OFF ON button Input to EN1 EN2 OFF ON OFF Safe Torque Off Wait for a run Wait for a run Safe Torque Off Inverter output STO Running command STO Figure 8 4 3 Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned OFF with the Inverter being Stopped Figure 8 4 4 Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned ON with the Inverter Running shows the timing scheme to apply when the emergency stop button is turned ON with the inverter running Input to the EN1 and EN2 goes OFF bringing the inverter into the Safe Torque Off STO state and coasting the motor to a stop Run command Run Stop Emergency stop OFF ON button Input to EN1 EN2 ON OFF Safe Torque Off Inverter output Running STO Figure 8 4 4 Inverter Output State when the Emergency Stop Button is Turned ON with the Inverter Running 155 8 4 5 F alarm caused by logic discrepancy and inverter output state Figure 8 4 5 shows the timing scheme to apply when EN1 and EN2 inputs are not aligned so that an alarm E occurs Turning the emergency stop button ON turns EN1 an
247. rters with a capacity of 11 to 22 kW it separates the upper and lower main circuit wires and control circuit wires Be careful about the wiring order Control circuit wires Upper main circuit wires Control circuit wires i Wiring guide Main circuit wires Main circuit wires Lower main circuit wires FRN7 5VG10 20 FRN22VG10 20 E Preparing for the wiring guide Inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below are sometimes lacking in wiring space for main circuit wires depending upon the wire materials used To assure a sufficient wiring space remove the clip off sections see below as required with a nipper Note that the enclosure rating of IP20 is not ensured when the wiring guide itself 1s removed to secure a space for thick main circuit wiring Clip off sections Before removal of clip off sections After removal of clip off sections Wiring Guide FRN7 5VG10 2D 17 Clip off sections If the inverter output wire size is 22 mm remove clip off section before wiring If it is 38 mm2 remove clip off section Y before wiring Wiring Guide FRN22VG1 0 20 8 In some types of inverters the wires from the main circuit terminal block cannot be straight routed Route such wires as shown below so that the front cover is set into place LAI I PLC XG X7 X8 LIRC oe Xe A x LIENTLPS LEN A f a t 9 For inverters with a c
248. run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV the motor did not start and an under bar _ _ appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The DC link bus voltage was Select Menu 5 MAINTENANCE in Programming mode on the keypad and low check the DC link bus voltage which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V class series and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V class series Refer to Section 3 4 4 6 gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 2 The main power is not ON Check whether the main power is turned ON to th trol circuit 1 i Se eee Check whether the short bar is removed from terminals P1 and P or check the suppieg short bar for poor contact Mount a short bar or DC reactor DCR between terminals P1 and P Or tighten the fixing screw further 3 Although power is supplied Check the connection to the main power and check if the H76 data is set to 1 not via the commercial power factory default line but via the DC link bus gt Correct the data of H76 the main power down detection is enabled H76 1 4 Breaks in wiring to the main Measure the input voltage power input terminals gt Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices MCCB MC etc 6 5 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the monitors Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measure
249. s This function is activated if the wires in the Output wiring fault inverter output circuit are not connected during tuning a during auto tuning Speed not arrived 15 r 7 espa faul 0002 during tuning with 0 H the motor running CR For manufacturers utac 0008 A D This function is activated if an error occurs in va Gate 0001 to 16 converter the A D converter circuit 0004 For manufacturers error This function is activated if the deviation Motor 1 speed not 0001 between the speed command reference agreed speed and the motor speed detected or Motor 2 speed not estimated speed becomes excessive 0002 d an 5 53 Speed not agree agreed The detection level and detection time can be Motor 3 speed not specified with function codes 0003 agreed Machine runaway DR detected by H149 Activated on a hardware fault in the UPAC o Da 0001 to See the related 18 UPAC error option or a communication error between the 0004 e ed inverter control circuit and the UPAC optin P l This function is activated if a Inter inverter communications error occurs in the 19 communicati inverter to inverter communications link ons link error using a high speed serial communication terminal block option Available soon Hardware Upon detection of an LSI failure on the 20 z ot printed circuit board this function stops the inverter output FRENIC VG Loader This function is activated if a PG data error 22 PG failur
250. s 1 No power neither main power Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance nor auxiliary control power gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current supplied to the inverter operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 The power for the control PCB Check if the jumper bar has been removed from terminals P1 and P or if there is did not reach a sufficiently a poor contact between the jumper bar and those terminals high level gt Mount a jumper bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and P For poor contact tighten up the screws 3 The keypad was not properly Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter connected to the inverter Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem recurs Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem recurs When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem recurs gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem per recurs 2 The desired function code does not appear Possible Causes Check and Measures 1 The function code is not Check whe
251. s information Available soon COMM INFO Copying data Read or write function code data as well as verifying it DATA COPY Checking changed function codes Display only the function code data that has been changed from the CHANGES factory default Setting the calendar clock Display hide the date and time and adjust the display format and DATE TIME data Compatibility with conventional inverter Not supported models MODE SEL e Select whether to display all function codes or limited ones selected in Loader 10 11 2 l UY Limiting function codes to be displayed LIMITED FC Eh e Cancel the directory structure of function codes m Configuring function code data Figure 3 2 1 shows the LCD screen transition for Menu 0 DATA SET A hierarchy exists among those screens that are shifted in the order of Menu screen List of function code groups and List of function codes On the modification screen of the target function code you can modify or check its data Menu screen List of function code groups List of function codes FOOPROTECT yore CMD WOPR METH lt meRIMAX SPEE F FUNDAMENTAL E TERMINAL C FRQ CONTRL P MOTOR 1 AV3 gt FN CODES Power ON N SNS ero or reset LANGUAGE DATA SET DATA CHECK OPR MNTR I O CHECK MAINTENANC LOAD FCTR ALM INF ALM CAUSE COMM INFO DATA COPY CHANGES DATEYTIME MODE SEL LIMITED FC
252. s standard Be sure to connect the DCR Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads in the same power supply line Note 6 Inverters of 55 kW or below 200 V class series and those of 160 kW or below 400 V class series have a built in braking transistor allowing a braking resistor DBR to be directly connected between terminals P and DB Note 7 When connecting an optional braking resistor DBR to inverters of 75 kW or above 200 V class series or those of 200 kW or above 400 V class series be sure to use an optional braking unit BU together Connect the BU between terminals P and N Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2 have polarity so make connection as shown in the connection diagram Note 8 A grounding terminal for a motor It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for suppressing inverter noise a LE Note 9 For wiring enclosed with use twisted or shielded wires In principle the shielded sheath of wires should be connected to ground If the inverter is significantly affected by external induction noise however connection to M 11 THC or bv CM PGM may be effective to suppress the influence of noise Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wir
253. seen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lightning or other disaster 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 136 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this co
254. so 7 Voltage input PGM q a Ia at 0 to 10 VDC PA a Analog input 2 i HA E Current input PB Input signal off OFF E l M SW3 4to20 mA DC PS Y WV 14 D Open collector pa isis Puissoupur output BRL FA a a r Safet itch Complementary FB ja f 7 7 gery SWIC output SW7 SW8 CM 4 12 EAS E 2 30C Contact outputs oo 30B Alarm output for any alarm Digital input 10 T 30A 30B 30C 30 30A YSC Relay output Operation ready RDY Run forward command Run reverse command Reset alarm AST Digital input 9 THR Enable external alarm trip 7HA BEE Digital input common H 1 A l 1 i Ho Y5A I Q Digital input 1 mt Transistor outputs Select multistep speed SS7 i lt Y4 gt r Digital input 2 ooi e 4 Transistor output 4 Select multistep speed SS2 A Detected speed 1 N D77 ae i i mu Select ener L i d Q Transistor output 3 paul input 4 ry i AE Speed arrival M AR 3 3 g Select multistep speed SS8 i i E lt Y2 gt Transistor output 2 Digital input 5 rs En 1 Speed agreement NJ G7 ASR Select ACC DEC time R77 it EL peec ag Digital input 6 oo a lt Y1 gt Transistor output 1 ASR Select ACC DEC time R72 Wr Speed existence N EX Digital input 7 1 GIS Coast to a stop BX 1 1 Lp lt CMY gt Digital input 8 TE 1 Transistor output common i i WA 1 Analog output 1 Ao1 9 Detected speed 1 N FB 1 Analog output 2 x Ao2 Torque current command 7 REF
255. splayed C Nota To remove the 4 3 CPU error turn the power to the inverter OFF and then ON The error cannot be removed by pressing the key 27 J Overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output lines were Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V and W and short circuited measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring Check 1f the resistance is too low Remove the short circuited part including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 2 Ground faults have occurred at Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a the inverter output lines Megger test for the inverter and the motor Refer to Section 7 6 Insulation Test gt Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Overload Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current trend Then use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt Ifthe load is too heavy reduce it or increase the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt Ifthere are any sudden changes make the load fluctuation smaller or increase the inverter capacity gt Under V f control Enable overcurrent limiting H58
256. ss the key to start tuning 4 Upon completion of auto tuning the H71 data automatically reverts to 0 5 Tuning result is stored in 010 When choosing the motor 2 M2 or the motor 3 M3 perform the tuning substitute the function code as shown in the below table A101 A159 Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 M3 lt Function code for adjusting gt The following function code function code is used to adjust when tuning Normally please leave the factory default settings H161 M1 Draw current command H171 M2 Draw current command H181 M3 Draw current command Data setting range 10 to 200 Default setting 80 Definition of 100 is P04 set value M1 rated current If the motor does not move from a stopped state or the motor vibrates might be able to resolve by increasing the current to be set H162 M1 Draw frequency H172 M2 Draw frequency H182 M3 Draw frequency Data setting range 0 1 10 0 Hz Default setting 1 0 Hz If the motor vibrates might be able to resolve by lowering the frequency to be set For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA SET For details of the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Details of Function Codes 70 lt Tuning notes gt If tuning can not start normally check and wiring by ref
257. stalling inverters in a panel for safety reasons in particular when installing the ones whose enclosure rating is IP00 When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements it is necessary to derate the inverter or consider the panel engineering design suitable for the special environment or the panel installation location For details refer to the Fuji Electric technical information Engineering Design of Panels or consult your Fuji Electric representative The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the panel installation location Highly concentrated sulfidizing gas or other corrosive gases A lot of conductive dust or foreign material e g metal powders or shavings carbon fibers or carbon dust A lot of fibrous or paper dust High humidity or dew condensation Vibration or shock exceeding the specified level Fumigation for export packaging Corrosive gases cause parts inside the inverter to corrode resulting in an inverter malfunction Entry of conductive dust into the inverter causes a short circuit Fibrous or paper dust accumulated on the heat sink lowers the cooing effect Entry of dust into the inverter causes the electronic circuitry to malfunction In an environment where a humidifier is used or where the air conditioner is not equipped with a dehumidifier high humidity or dew condensation results whi
258. t lt o o o ES ES lt lt o Q o lt lt lt lt lt _ i olo oO oO ojo lt lt EE lt lt lt lt ES ES lt lt lt lt lt ESE ES ES lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt P lt lt lt lt EJES lt lt EJES lt lt lt E RERRERRRE lt o a lt i Ea E lt E ES EJES lt lt lt Remarks Function code E69 E70 E71 E72 m m NIN R m m m m NINI NIN ol Noja h gt 5 m N o E80 E81 E82 E83 E84 Communica tions address 485 Link No 145h h 146 gt i Z A ro a al ALAR _ Rh W 3 Name Terminal A01 Function Terminal A02 Function 1 Terminal A03 Function 1 h Terminal Ao3 Function ae ee ie h Terminal Ao4 Function eren Ta OS 10 006 10000 tines v 0100 1 CS ETT O A eey EI HEN ooo ion Poo ie h Ao2 Bias asss f h Ao5 Bias sis Poras Fer oo h Terminal Ao2 Function Drive control Cc 2 w Data setting range N amp E Vit D lt c D S cs c 0 lt x 6 gt oO oO oO e Je E O 1 Y lotoso eee 0 Detected speed 1 Speed indicator one way deflection N FB1 Nmax 10V 1 Detected speed 1 Speed indicator two way deflection N FB1 Nmax 10V 2 Reference speed 2 before ACC DEC cal
259. t SHA HA MAA ae ES AA ERA E ES o BRPFEITAROS eMBIO SALLE ARTERIA A ATAR AR o FFRAN EE 48 8 35 RO T0 R1 71 tat ERIA BET eM TRAN ET E MaR AFE RA haw isIE Heth ARE ED REDBTNDD e HANI BRRORIC AFIS cath CTO cHES TK o EH RODAR to ETE a AE O bite F ITV IDA LICOHRL CD STIS E ZED ADRA SAME ROTO RITE LeMUTHSCECHRBLTD SITS Ceo e RMA N WAKRCH gt Tb AORE REAR E DF NUIT o o RTRS E Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details FO A WARNING A RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK A A TI fe 512 fh FS b FRN220VG 10 40 Figure 1 2 2 Warning Plates and Label 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters This section provides precautions in introducing inverters e g precautions for installation environment power supply lines wiring and connection to peripheral equipment Be sure to observe those precautions 1 3 1 Installation environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 3 1 Table 1 3 1 Environmental Requirements Item Specifications Site location Indoors Surrounding temperature 10 to 50 C Note 1 Relative humidity 5 to 95 No condensation Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gases oil mist vapor or water drops Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 The atmosphere can c
260. t at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur A CAUTION e The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent them from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur vi Operation AWARNING Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power 1s ON Otherwise an electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at the time of restarting Otherwise an accident could occur If the stall prevention function torque limiter has been selected the inverter may operate with acceleration deceleration or speed different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety 1s ensured even in such cases The key on th
261. t between the terminals CMY and CM in this case Transistor output Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signals output Electrically isolated from terminals CM 11 M and PGM common E Connecting programmable logic controller PLC to terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 Figure 2 2 11 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit ofthe PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b 1t serves as a SOURCE for the output lt Control circuit gt 4 Programmable lt Control circuit gt ale logic controller logic controller Photocoupler Current Photocoupler Current 31 BEV SOURCE input a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 2 11 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit YSA C General 1 A general purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the purpose relay transistor output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 output Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3 A cos 4 0 3 48 VDC 0 5 A 2 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals YSA and Y5C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals YSA and Y5C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally
262. t uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 to X9 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch is turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it is turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal FWD REV or X1 to X9 When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Programmable lt i it gt f lt i it gt logic controller Control circuit Control circuit SOURCE X1 to X9 if FWD REV Photocoupler O CM S 7 a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 2 9 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 2 8 Setting up the slide switches Analog 1 Output of monitor signals with analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC output 1 Various signals such as Detected speed Speed setting and Torque current Analog command can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E67 to E71 output 2 For details refer to Chapter 5 Function Codes 2 Hardware specifications e Connect
263. ted via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit RO TO e Mount the keypad e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X9 of the control circuit e If an external speed command potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e If an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y 1 to Y4 and Relay output terminals YS5A Y5C will not be turned ON e Disable the RS 485 communications link C Note If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the surrounding temperature within 25 10 C 2 Turn ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter 1s in stopped state 4 Turn OFF the main circuit power 5 The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Note If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement has not started Check the conditions listed in i 6 After has disappeared from the LED monitor turn ON the main circuit power again
264. ters Inverter output terminals U V and W and secondary grounding terminals G for motor Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the 3 phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning the phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal G Cote When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Inverter 1 Motor 1 Motor 2 oa Multicof e cable 4 A Motor 3 25 DC reactor terminals P1 and P Connect a DC reactor DCR to these terminals for power factor correction 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P Inverters of 75 kW or above and LD mode inverters of 55 kW are not equipped with a jumper bar 2 Connect an optional DCR to those terminals CNote e The wiring length should be 10 m or below Do not remove the jumper bar when a DCR is not used e For inverters of 75 kW or above and LD mode inverters of 55 kW a DCR is provided as standard Be sure to connect the DCR to the inverter e When a PWM converter is connected to the inverter no DCR is required AWARNING Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and DB Inverters
265. the data of F44 or F45 to the appropriate value Check whether the torque command of terminal Ai A12 is zero 0 under torque control mode gt Modify the torque command to the appropriate value Check whether the setting of function code P28 A30 or A130 matches the pulse resolution of the actual PG gt Modify the data of P28 A30 or A130 to the appropriate value Check whether the voltage setting of terminal PGP SW6 matches the voltage specification of the actual PG gt Set SW6 to the appropriate position Check the magnetic pole position gt Adjust the magnetic pole position 010 A60 A160 Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 3 3 Vector control for PMSM with speed sensor and magnetic pole position sensor MW Adjusting the magnetic pole position 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not change Possible Causes 1 The setting of the maximum speed was too low 2 The setting of the speed limiter was too low 3 The reference speed analog setting did not change 4 The external circuit wiring to terminals X1 to X9 or signal assignment to those terminals is wrong 5 A reference speed e g multistep speed or via communications link with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the reference speed was too low 6 The acceleration or deceleration time was too long or too short 7 Overload Under V f control 8 Function code settings do not agree with
266. the ground 5 Value of 5 MQ or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state The value is measured on an inverter alone Inverter V L1 R L2 S L3 T DB P1 P N U w RO TO Ri Megger Figure 7 6 1 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test 2 Insulation test of control circuit Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit Use a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Discomnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the wiring connected to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter 135 7 7 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 7 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information 1 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 3 4 ROM version refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 6 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage unce
267. the measurement in comparison with the initial capacitance measured at shipment C Note When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input the load conditions widely differ so that the discharging time cannot be accurately measured In this case measuring of the discharging time can be disabled with the function code H104 Bit 0 0 for preventing unintended measuring 2 ON time counting of DC link bus capacitor In a machine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down the inverter does not measure the discharging time For such an inverter the ON time counting is provided The ON time counting result can be represented as elapsed time CAPEH and time remaining before the end of life CAPRH as shown in Table 7 4 2 5 MAINTENANCE on the LCD monitor column 1 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment The measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF The measuring result can be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance e Capacitance measuring procedure 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e In case another inverter is connec
268. the motor 2 The rotation direction specification of the motor is opposite to that of the inverter 3 Incorrect setting of speed command related function code data Under vector control with speed sensor 4 Wrong wiring of the PG What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect the inverter output terminals U V and W to the motor input terminals U V and W respectively The rotation direction of IEC compliant motors is opposite to that of incompliant motors gt Switch the FWD REV signal setting Check the data of the speed command related function codes referring to the speed command block diagram given in the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct the data of the related function codes Check the wiring to the motor gt Correct the wiring Refer to Section 4 2 2 Mounting direction of a pulse generator PG and PG signals 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The analog speed command fluctuates What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signal status for the speed command with Menu 4 I O CHECK using the keypad Refer to Section 3 4 4 5 gt Increase the filter constants F83 E61 to E64 for the speed command gt Take measures to keep the speed command constant 117 Possible Causes 2 3 4 5 6 7 An external potent
269. ther the function code is located in a different directory located in the current directory gt Display the function codes in the directory referring to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 Programming Mode If o codes do not appear check whether an option board is mounted gt Display the function codes in the directory referring to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 Programming Mode Note No o codes appear unless an option board is mounted 122 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running The data of the function codes is protected The WE KP terminal command Enable data change with keypad is not entered though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal The key was not pressed The data of function codes F02 and E01 through E09 cannot be changed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 OPR MNTR using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor and then change the data of the function codes Check the data of function code F00 Data Protection gt Change the data of F00 from Enable data protection F00 1 to Disable data protection F00 0 Check the data of functi
270. tings printed on the nameplate of the motor 200 V class series 220 V i t Volt NaN SOUR UE VOreBe 400 V class series 440 V M2 Maximum Output Voltage M3 Maximum Output Voltage 80 V M1 Maximum Speed M2 Maximum Speed Machinery design values 1500 r min M3 Maximum Speed Note For a test driving of the motor increase Acceleration time 1 values so that they are longer than your machinery Note design values If the specified time is short the 5 00 s 7 inverter may not run the motor properly Deceleration time 1 5 00 5 Note M1 Torque Boost 2 0 For constant torque load M2 Torque Boost Note In applications requiring a starting torque 0 0 Auto torque boost adjust the torque boost P35 A55 A155 within the range from 2 0 to 20 0 M3 Torque Boost 65 For motors except Fuji VG motor Configure the function codes as listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values The motor ratings are printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them In applications requiring a starting torque adjust the torque boost P35 A55 A155 within the range from 2 0 to 20 0 or perform motor parameter auto tuning H01 2 and then set the torque boost P31 A55 A155 to 0 0 auto torque boost For details on how to modify the function code data refer to the FRENIC VG User s Manual Chapter 3 Section 3 4 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 DATA
271. tion of a DC AC reactor Use a DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500 kVA or more and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads If no DCR is used the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitors If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 3 DC reactor DCR for correcting the inverter input power factor for suppressing harmonics Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC EN61800 3 To correct the inverter input power factor to suppress harmonics use a DCR Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and correct the power factor of the inverter DCR models Input power factor The last letter identifies the capacitance These DCR models comply with Standard Specifications for Public Building Construction Electric Equipment 2010 version supervised by the Ministry of Land Infrastructure Transport and Tourism DCR2 4 00 00A 00B Approx 90 to 95 The input power factor 1s 94 or above when the power factor of the fundamental harmonic is assumed as 1 according
272. tive Maintenance Function Selection 2 h 1FO5h Protective Maintenance Function Selection 3 1FO6h Light Alarm Object Definition 1 T Alarm Object Definition 2 i Alarm Object Definition 3 T Alarm Object Definition 4 Alarm Object Definition 5 Light Alarm Object Definition 6 h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 6 h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 7 h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 8 h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 9 h M1 Magnetic Saturation Extension Coefficient 10 Drive control Cc O f tw Data setting range N amp E Vit Change when running 0000 to 1111 0101 Selects the protective functions individually 0 Disable 1 Enable Thousands digit Start delay L Hundreds digit Ground fault Tenths digit Output phase loss 7 Units digit Braking transistor broken 5 7 0000 to 1111 Selects the protective maintenance functions individually 0 Disable 1 Enable Thousands digit PG wire break 49 Hundreds digit Lower the carrier frequency Tenths digit Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Units digit Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 Factory default level 1 User setup level 1110 0000 to 1111 0000 Selects the protective maintenance functions individually 0 Disable 1 Enable Thousands digit Hundreds digit Tenths digit Units digit 0000 to 1111 0 Heavy al
273. unction 100 00 to 100 00 times lt e oe z lt p lt a RARAS E T S E ewe EEES EJES MES SES RES ES RES MES ES ON ERES lt z z z z lt z lt lt z z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt VC forPMsm Y 1 1 3 39 SOCIE lt 1 00 00 010 100 0 v 00 VV Vv 100010 100 0 os vivio viii 100 010 100 0 os vivio yyy 100010 100 0 os vivio viii o o Q o Oo o a Q o mn 88 Remarks Function code E90 E91 E101 E102 E103 E104 E105 E106 E107 E108 E109 E110 E114 E115 E116 E117 E118 Communica tions address 485 h Link Command Function 2 Selection 1 Available soon H Link Command Function Selection 2 Available soon Name Dir Link No Data setting range 0 Shut down input signal OFF 3 Torque bias level TB REF 5 Creep speed 2 for UP DOWN control CRP N2 6 Detect line speed LINE N 7 Motor temperature M TMP 8 Speed override N OR 9 PID feedback amount 1 PID FB1 10 PID command amount PID REF 11 PID correction gain PID G 12 PID feedback amount 2 PID FB2 13 Observer torque FB OBS TFB 0 to 26 When E91 0 OFF analog setting via the communications link S17 has priority over Ai input specified by Ai function selection Refer to the Link Command Function Selection 1 1E01h H Ai1 Offset 4 100 00 to 100 00 H Ai2 Offset 1 m O N a
274. unction codes H81 and H82 The light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 3 1 For instructions on how to check and release light alarms see Section 3 3 5 Monitoring light alarms MH How to remove the current light alarm When the torque command exceeds the torque limiter level F44 F45 during acceleration Stall prevention deceleration or constant speed running this function limits the motor torque generated in order to avoid an overcurrent trip Automatic lowering of Before the inverter trips due to an abnormal surrounding temperature or output current carrier frequency this function automatically lowers the carrier frequency to avoid a trip When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level this function issues the Motor overload early warning signal M OL before the thermal overload protection function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection Motor overload early warning When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to Auto reset automatically reset and restart itself The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be specified This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main circuit Surge protection power lines and the ground 102 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting AWARNINGA e If any of the protective functions has been activated first remove the cause
275. ust have a common disconnect and be connected to the same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are connected to the power supply MCCB Disconnect or MC RCD ELCB etc Power supply FRENIC VG 147 Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION 7 Environmental Requirements e Surrounding ambient temperature Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 50 C Atmosphere For use in pollution degree 2 environments for Open Type models 8 Install UL certified fuses or circuit breaker between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Required torque ae 2 lb in N m Wire size AWG mm L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter type Power supply voltage Class J fuse size Circuit breaker trip size UI W AS Main terminal SO Nominal applied motor Aux Fan power supply T 60 C Cu wire gt ES 75 C Cu wire Aux control power supply FRN0 75V G10 20 FRNI SVGIO20 FRN2 2VGIO20 FRN3 7 G10 20 2 1 2 1 5 3 l FRNS 5VG1IO 20 co os p w Ne f 8 4 FRN7 5VG10 20 E 22 3 7 5 5 T 22 30 37 45 55 75 110 ES A Remarks EE MR 13 3 4 7 21 2 3 4 26 7 E A 2 O Lu MS RoN N N Aw 33 6 2 0 Three phase 200V FRN30VG10 20 LD 3 0 85 FRN37 G10 20 4 0 107 2 2 0x2 67 4x2 3 0x2 85x2 4 0x2 FRN45VvG10 20 FRN55VG10 20
276. ut motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the or key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference speed using N Y keys Check the above points during a test run 4 Troubleshooting for motor abnormality If any of the following abnormalities is found during a test run follow the troubleshooting procedure in Table 4 4 2 CII Turning the inverter ON triggers a 57 alarm e Entering a run command triggers a 47 or E F alarm e Entering a run command does not run the motor or increase the speed Table 4 4 2 Troubleshooting for Motor Abnormality too small relative to the load gt Increase the F44 data in increments of 5 inverter and motor 3 Correct the wiring 3 Wrong PG wiring Check the wiring of the PG gt Correct the wiring 4 PMSM magnetic pole position Check the magnetic pole position not matched gt Adjust the magnetic pole position 010 A60 A160 referring to ll Setting the magnetic pole position sensor offset value MW Adjusting the magnetic pole position in Section 4 3 3 73 4 5 Selecting a Speed Command Source A speed command source is the keypad W Y keys by factory default This section provides the speed command setting procedures using the speed command sources of the keypad external potentiometer and speed selection terminal commands 4 5 1 Setting up a speed command from th
277. vervoltage voltage or regenerative braking current from the motor Note that the inverter cannot be protected from excessive voltage high voltage for example supplied by mistake Wire break This function is activated if a wire breaks in na a the PA PB circuit on the PG terminal or in E 91 25 PG wire the power supply circuit break l It does not work under vector control without speed sensor or under V f control Power shutdown detected inverter unit This function is activated if the bypass circuit of the DC link bus is not configured that is the magnetic contactor for bypass of the Ch charging circuit is not closed even after the 40 arger ede j i lied For manufacturers ice main power is applied For models of 37 kW or above in 200 V class series and 75 kW or above in 400 V class series synchronizati ae y synchronization with each other on error The inverter monitors 2 bit signals of toggle signal 1 TGLI and toggle signal 2 TGL2 which are sent from the PLC Toggle data 42 l error When the inverter receives no prescribed ie ow This error occurs when the E SX tact cycle 41 wE and inverter control cycle are out of change pattern within the time specified by H144 this error occurs 43 Refer to the Functional Safety Card pinata instruction manual for details pea safety card This alarm cannot be removed by the Safety Card fli inverter s reset function OPC VG1 SAFE di instruction manual
278. vice life using Menu 5 MAINTENANCE in Section 3 4 4 6 1 Turn by hand Be sure to turn the power OFF beforehand 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection Judgment on service life using Menu 5 MAINTENANCE in Section 3 4 4 6 Visual inspection 125 1 2 No abnormalities 3 Capacitance gt Initial value x 0 85 1 No abnormalities 2 Within 10 of the resistance of the braking resistor 1 2 3 4 No abnormalities 1 Smooth rotation 2 3 No abnormalities No clogging or accumulation of dust dirt or foreign materials Clean it if any with a vacuum cleaner 2 Periodical inspection 2 When the inverter is ON or it is running Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is ON or it is running Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7 3 2 Table 7 3 2 Periodic Inspection List 2 Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Input voltage Check that the input voltages of the main Measure the input voltages The standard specifications and control circuits are correct using a multimeter or the must be satisfied like Structure such as Check for abnormal noise or excessive Visual and auditory No abnormalities chassis and covers vibration when the inverter is running inspections 1t Transformers Check for abnormal roaring noise or odor Auditory visual and No abnor
279. well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents C Tip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations Ely This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information viii Chapter 1 BEFORE USE 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Nameplates and type of inverter Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and the following accessories are contained Accessories DC reactor DCR for inverters of 75 kW or above and LD mode inverters of 55 kW Instruction manual this document CD ROM containing the FRENIC VG User s Manual FRENIC VG Loader free version and FRENIC VG Loader Instruction Manual 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the type you ordered You can check the type and specifications on the main and sub nameplates The main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter as shown in Figure 1 2 1 For inverters of 30 kW or above the mass is printed on the main nameplate FOF ji Electric hias TYPE FRN30VG1S 4J es High Dut Medium Dut Low Dut 3PH 380 480V 50Hz 60Hz SOURCE 17 94 94 3A OUTPUT 3PH 380 480V 0 800Hz VA GOA SIRVA 75A IP Code IP00 SER No 68A123A0579E BB SCCR 100kA C ES c UL os IG MASS 25kg Manr KCC REI fek VG1 012 Offenbach 132902 7898 IND CONT EQ Made in Japan
280. with 5 Trip with 5 after running for the period specified by timer H33 Trip with 4 5 if a communications error persists En Communications Link Function 2 Oor1 Y Data protection via link 0 Writable to function code fields 1 Write protect function code fields Setting H29 to 1 protects function code data from RIR iw 3 mo 5 gt 35 Y 72 gt H30 41Eh DO H31 41Fh h Station address 3 YIY LY H32 420h exceeding the period specified by timer H33 er E Pe Hu po A EOI E A A ES Continue to run AAA y lt lt ERA RA RR S N EN E YAA AAA A ARA IM T H33 1 0 01 to 20 00 s Y a a T aie a ME M H36 424h h Parity check 76 Y Y Y Y 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity A k hi lik H38 426h h Communications line break time 0 0 to 60 0 s Y Y Y Y 0 0 Disable detection 0 1 to 60 0 Enable detection H39 427h Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s EAR Maca aaa H40 428h h Protocol selection 1 0to2 YIN 78 Y Y Y Y 0 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol 1 SX protocol Loader protocol 2 Modbus RTU protocol To use the FRENIC VG Loader set H40 to 1 95 Remarks Function code T H42 H43 H44 H46 H47 H48 H49 H50 H51 H52 H53 H55 H56 H57 H58 H60 H61 H62 H63 H64 H65 H66 H68 H70 H71 H74 Drive control Communica tions address Name Dir Data setting range Link No 485 c 2 5
281. ynchronous motor GNF2 consult your Fuji Electric representative e A single inverter cannot drive two or more PMSMs e A PMSM cannot be driven by commercial power 11 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER 2 1 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally AWARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 1 and Table 2 1 1 are maintained at all times When mounting the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the surrounding temperature easily rises Do not mount the inverter in a small panel with poor ventilation E When mounting two or more inverters When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel basically lay them out side by side When mounting them necessarily one above the other be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the surrounding temperature is 40 C or lower inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below can be mounted side by side without any clearance between them Table 2 1 1 0 75 to 22 kW Clearances mm 30 to 220 kW 280 to 630 kW C Space required in front

FRENIC-VG IM INR-SI47_1580b-E

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents